Owner's Manual. Mini Countryman Plug-In Hybrid

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG-IN HYBRID.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG-IN HYBRID.

Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTES Information...... 8

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance...... 20

AT A GLANCE Cockpit...... 40 Central Information Display (CID)...... 44 Voice activation system...... 53 General settings...... 56 Owner's Manual media...... 68 MINI eDRIVE...... 70 Safety of the hybrid system...... 73

CONTROLS Opening and closing...... 76 Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel...... 99 Transporting children safely...... 111 Driving...... 116 Displays...... 138 Lights...... 161 Safety...... 167 Driving stability control systems...... 187 Driving comfort...... 191 Climate control...... 211 Interior equipment...... 220 Storage compartments...... 227 Cargo area...... 230

4 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving...... 240 Saving fuel...... 245

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle...... 252 Refueling...... 261 Fuel...... 264 Wheels and tires...... 266 Engine compartment...... 283 Engine oil...... 286 Coolant...... 290 Maintenance...... 292 Replacing components...... 294 Breakdown assistance...... 305 Care...... 312

REFERENCE Technical data...... 320 Appendix...... 322 Everything from A to Z...... 324

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 VI/18, 07 18 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

5 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 NOTES

Information ...... 8

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 8

NOTES Information

Information

Using this Owner's Manual are available on the Internet: www.mini- usa.com. Orientation Integrated Owner's Manual in the The fastest way to find information on a vehicle particular topic is by using the index. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- describes features and functions found in vided in the first chapter. the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad- Updates made after the editorial ditional information, refer to page 68. deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, MINI Motorer’s Guide app differences may exist between the printed The app specifically describes features and Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's functions found in the vehicle. The app can Manual in the vehicle. be displayed on smartphones and tablets. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for MINI Driver’s Guide Web the vehicle. Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable information for the selected vehicle. If Owner's Manual for Navigation, possible, only equipment and functions that Entertainment, Communication are actually installed in the vehicle will be The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis- tainment, and Communication can be ob- played in any current browser. tained as printed book from the service center. The topics are also discussed in the Symbols and displays Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Symbols in the Owner's Manual Additional sources of informa- Symbol Meaning tion Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the Dealer’s service center possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious A dealer’s service center will be glad to an- damage to the vehicle. swer questions at any time. Measures that can be taken to Internet help protect the environment. The Owner's Manual and general Informa- tion about MINI, for example on technology,

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 9

Information NOTES

Symbol Meaning components results in the risk of life-threat- ening injury from electric shock. "..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with Vehicle features and options the voice activation system.. ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the This Owner's Manual describes all models voice activation system. and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the Action steps model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates fea- Action steps to be carried out are presented tures and functions that are not available in as numbered list. The steps must be carried a vehicle, for example because of the se- out in the defined order. lected optional features or the country-spe- 1. First action step. cific version. 2. Second action step. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. Enumerations When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be Enumerations without mandatory order or observed. alternative possibilities are presented as list with bullet points. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the – First possibility. Supplementary Owner's Manuals. – Second possibility. Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have Symbols on vehicle components about the features and options applicable to This symbol on a vehicle component your vehicle. indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual. Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con- ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of orange-colored high-voltage

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 10

NOTES Information

Updates made after the editorial ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further deadline information on warranty is available from a dealer’s service center. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Maintenance and repairs Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the ap- WARNING pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for Improperly performed work on the vehicle the vehicle. paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or For Your Own Safety risk of damage to property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors performed by a Manufacturer dealer’s service center or another qualified The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- service center or repair shop only. sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG. Advanced technology, e. g. the use of mod- ern materials and high-performance elec- Intended use tronics, requires suitable maintenance and Follow the following when using the vehi- repair work. cle: The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- – Owner's Manual. mends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If – Information on the vehicle. Do not re- you choose to use another service facility, move stickers. the manufacturer of your vehicle recom- – Technical vehicle data. mends use of a facility that performs work, – The traffic, speed, and safety laws where for instance maintenance and repair, ac- the vehicle is driven. cording to MINI specifications with prop- – Vehicle documents and statutory docu- erly trained personnel, referred to in this ments. Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop". Warranty If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a Your vehicle is technically configured for risk of subsequent damage and related the operating conditions and registration safety risks. requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- Parts and accessories ent country it might be necessary to adapt The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- your vehicle to potentially differing operat- mends the use of parts and accessory prod- ing conditions and registration require- ucts approved by the manufacturer of the ments. If your vehicle does not comply with MINI. the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge war-

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 11

Information NOTES

Approved parts and accessories, and advice www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- on their use and installation are available hicle. from a MINI dealer's service center. MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their WARNING safety and suitability in MINI vehicles. Operating, servicing and maintaining a The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants passenger vehicle or off-highway motor genuine MINI parts and accessories. vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- The manufacturer of your vehicle does not cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, evaluate whether each individual product phthalates, and lead, which are known to from another manufacturer can be used the State of California to cause cancer and with MINI vehicles without presenting a birth defects or other reproductive harm. safety hazard, even if a country-specific of- To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex- ficial approval was issued. The manufac- haust, do not idle the engine except as turer of your vehicle does not evaluate necessary, service your vehicle in a well- whether these products are suitable for ventilated area and wear gloves or wash MINI vehicles under all usage conditions. your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to California Proposition 65 Warning www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. California law requires vehicle manufactur- ers provide the following warning: Service and warranty WARNING We recommend that you read this publica- Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by tomobile components and parts, including the following warranties: components found in the interior furnish- – New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi- – Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and repro- – Federal Emissions System Defect War- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids ranty. contained in vehicles and certain products – Federal Emissions Performance War- of component wear contain or emit chemi- ranty. cals known to the State of California to – California Emission Control System Lim- cause cancer and birth defects or other re- ited Warranty. productive harm. Battery posts, terminals Detailed information about these warranties and related accessories contain lead and is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor- lead compounds. Batteries also contain mation Booklet for US models or in the War- other chemicals known to the State of Cali- ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana- fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands dian models. after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- Your vehicle has been specifically adapted ratory animals. Always protect your skin and designed to meet the particular operat- by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ing conditions and homologation require- ter. For more information go to ments in your country and continental re-

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 12

NOTES Information

gion in order to deliver the full driving Information about stored or exchanged data pleasure while the vehicle is operated under can be requested from the manufacturer of those conditions. If you wish to operate the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- your vehicle in another country or region, ple. you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating con- Personal reference ditions and homologation requirements. Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- You should also be aware of any applicable cle identification number. Depending on the warranty limitations or exclusions for such country, the vehicle owner can be identified country or region. In such case, please con- with the vehicle identification number, li- tact Customer Relations for further informa- cense plate and corresponding authorities. tion. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or Maintenance vehicle owner, e.g. via utilized services. Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and Operating data in the vehicle the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Control units process data to operate the ve- Specifications for required maintenance hicle. measures: For example, this includes: – MINI Maintenance system. – Status messages for the vehicle and its – Service and Warranty Information Book- individual components, e.g., wheel rota- let for US models. tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, – Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for transverse acceleration, engaged safety Canadian models. belt indicator. If the vehicle is not maintained according to – Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, these specifications, this could result in se- rain sensor signals. rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is The processed data is only processed in the not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim- vehicle itself and generally volatile. The ited Warranty. data is not stored beyond the operating period. Electronic components, e.g. control units Data memory and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information General information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance requirements or faults Electronic control devices are installed in can be stored temporarily or permanently. the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- This information generally records the state generate or exchange with each other. Some of a component, a module, a system, or the control units are necessary for the vehicle environment, for instance: to function safely or provide assistance dur- – Operating states of system components, ing driving, for instance driver assistance e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, systems. Furthermore, control devices facil- battery status. itate comfort or infotainment functions.

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 13

Information NOTES

– Malfunctions and faults in important another qualified service center or repair system components, for instance lights shop performs repair or servicing work. and brakes. – Responses by the vehicle to special sit- Data entry and data transfer into uations such as airbag deployment or the vehicle engagement of the driving stability control systems. General information – Information on vehicle-damaging Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- events. fort and individual settings can be stored in The data is required to perform the control the vehicle and modified or reset at any device functions. Furthermore, it also time. serves to recognize and correct malfunc- For example, this includes: tions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to – Settings for the seat and steering wheel optimize vehicle functions. positions. The majority of this data is transient and is – Suspension and climate control settings. only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored If necessary, data can be transferred to the event-related in event or fault memories. entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, e.g. via smartphone. When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and qual- This includes the following depending on ity assurance measures, this technical infor- the respective equipment: mation can be read out from the vehicle to- – Multimedia data such as music, films or gether with the vehicle identification photos for playback in an integrated number. multimedia system. A dealer’s service center or another quali- – Address book data for use in conjunc- fied service center or repair shop can read tion with an integrated hands-free sys- out the information. The socket for OBD On- tem or an integrated navigation system. board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- – Entered navigation destinations. hicle is used to read out the data. – Data on the use of Internet services. The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service This data can be stored locally in the vehicle network. The data documents technical con- or is found on a device that has been conditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi- nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, fication of the fault, compliance with war- USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is ranty obligations and quality improvement. stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time. Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with prod- This data is only transmitted to third parties uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the upon personal request as part of the use of vehicle manufacturer needs technical data online services. This depends on the se- from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle lected settings for the use of the services. can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty. Incorporation of mobile end devices Fault and event memories in the vehicle can Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo- be reset when a dealer’s service center or bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 14

NOTES Information

stance smartphones, can be controlled via protection is provided there too. Personal the vehicle control elements. data may be used to perform online serv- The sound and picture from the mobile de- ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con- vice can be played back and displayed nection, for instance with the IT systems of through the multimedia system. Certain in- the vehicle manufacturer intended for this formation is transferred to the mobile de- purpose. vice at the same time. Depending on the Any collection, processing, and use of per- type of incorporation, this includes, for in- sonal data above and beyond that needed to stance position data and other general vehi- provide the services must always be based cle information. This optimizes the way in on a legal permission, contractual arrange- which selected apps, for instance navigation ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- or music playback, work. vate or deactivate the data connection as a There is no further interaction between the whole. That is, with the exception of func- mobile device and the vehicle, for instance tions and services required by law such as active access to vehicle data. Assist systems. How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular Services from other providers app being used. The extent of the possible When using online services from other pro- settings depends on the respective app and viders, these services are the responsibility the operating system of the mobile device. of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. Services The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this proc- General information ess. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation If the vehicle has a wireless network con- to services from third parties, the scope of nection, this enables data to be exchanged such data, and its purpose, can be obtained between the vehicle and other systems. The from the relevant service provider. wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This Event Data Recorder EDR wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online This vehicle is equipped with an event data services and apps supplied by the vehicle recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR manufacturer or by other providers. is to record, in certain crash or near crash- like situations, such as an air bag deploy- Services from the vehicle ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that manufacturer will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to Where online services from the vehicle record data related to vehicle dynamics and manufacturer are concerned, the corre- safety systems for a short period of time, sponding functions are described in the ap- typically 30 seconds or less. propriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- vant legal information pertaining to data cord such data as:

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 15

Information NOTES

– How various systems in your vehicle Vehicle identification number were operating. – Whether or not the driver and passen- Engine compartment ger safety belts were fastened. – How far, if at all, the driver was depress- ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. – How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- The vehicle identification number can be ing conditions and no personal data, for in- found in the engine compartment, on the stance name, gender, age, and crash loca- right-hand side of the vehicle. tion, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the Type label type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. The vehicle identification number can be found on the type label, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 16

NOTES Information

Windshield other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti- fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 17

Information NOTES

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 QUICK REFERENCE

Your MINI at a glance ...... 20

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

Your MINI at a glance

Opening and closing Locking the vehicle Press button on the remote control. Buttons on the remote control All vehicle access points are locked. Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlocking the tailgate With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate 4 Panic mode Buttons for the central locking system.

Unlocking the vehicle Locking Press button on the remote control. Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed. Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked. Unlocking If only the driver's door is unlocked, press Pressing the button unlocks the ve- the button of the remote control again to hicle. unlock the other vehicle access points. Press and hold this button on the Panic mode remote control after unlocking. You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote Press button on the remote control control is pressed. and hold for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 21

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation Concept The vehicle can be accessed without acti- Concept vating the remote control. The tailgate can be opened and closed with All you need to do is to have the remote no-touch activation using the remote con- control with you, such as in your pants trol you are carrying. pocket. Performing the foot movement The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle or in the car's interior. at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle. Unlocking the vehicle 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back.

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button. Tailgate Locking the vehicle Opening

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button. Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate. – Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

– If carrying the remote control, press the Seats, mirrors, and steering button on the tailgate. wheel – Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 sec- Manually adjustable seats ond. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Closing

1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Height 4 Backrest tilt Press button on the inside of the tailgate. Electrically adjustable seats

– Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the tailgate. 1 Memory function – Press button, arrow 2. 2 Lumbar support The vehicle will be locked after closing 3 Backrest tilt the tailgate. The driver's door must be 4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt closed for this purpose and the remote control must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 23

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Adjusting the head restraint Adjusting the steering wheel

Height In four directions

– To raise: push the head restraint up. 1. Fold the lever down. – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and 2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- push the head restraint down. red height and angle to suit your seating position. Adjusting the exterior mirrors 3. Fold the lever back up. Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function: – Seat position. – Exterior mirror position. 1 Settings – Height of the Head-up Display. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor Storing 3 Folding in and out 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.

3. Press button. The LED in the button lights up. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the seat while the LED is illuminated. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings The stored position is called up automatically.

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

Press selected button 1 or 2. Driver's door The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat or one of the memory buttons is pressed. While driving, the seat position adjustment on the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.

Displays and control elements 1 Safety switch In the vicinity of the steering 2 Power windows wheel 3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Low beams, fog lights 2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal 1 Selector lever 3 Instrument cluster 2 Controller with buttons 4 Washer/wiper system 3 Parking brake Indicator/warning lights Central Information Display (CID) Instrument cluster Concept The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of Several of the lights are checked for proper switches. These functions can be operated functioning and light up temporarily when via the Controller or touchscreen. the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 25

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Controller If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information General information Display (CID). The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- Terminating the voice activation system lect menu items and enter the settings. Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹. Buttons on the Controller

Button Function Help on the voice activation system – To have information on the operating Press once: call up main menu. principle of the voice activation system Press twice: open recently used read out loud: ›General information on menus. voice control‹. Open the Communication menu. – To have help for the current menu read out loud: ›Help‹.

Open the Media/Radio menu. Information on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to Open destination input menu for initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful navigation. situations, the voice and vocal pitch can Open navigation map. change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- tablishment of a phone connection. Open the previous display. Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior mirror. Open the Options menu. Driving Voice activation Activating/deactivating drive- Using the voice activation system ready state

Activating the voice activation system Ignition on/off – On: press the Start/Stop 1. Press the button on the steering button. wheel. Most of the indicator/ 2. Wait for the signal. warning lights light up for 3. Say the command. a varied length of time. This symbol in the instrument cluster – Off: press the Start/Stop button again. indicates that the voice activation system is All indicator lights go out. active. – Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

on the radio or when the engine is run- The LED and indicator light go out. ning, press the Start/Stop button. The parking brake is released. Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. Steptronic transmission

Activating/deactivating drive-ready Selector lever positions state Parking position P. Reverse R. Activating Neutral N. 1. Close the driver's door. Drive mode D. 2. Depress the brake pedal. Engage selector lever position P or R only 3. Press the Start/Stop button. when the vehicle is stationary. The drive-ready state is active: electric driv- To prevent the vehicle from creeping after ing is possible, or the engine can be started. you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are Deactivating ready to start. 1. Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped. Selector lever lock 2. Press the Start/Stop button. A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector 3. Set the parking brake, if needed. lever position and, depending on the transmission version, inadvertent switching to Auto Start/Stop function selector lever position P or R. The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the combustion engine when conditions for electric driving have been met. The ignition remains switched on. READY appears on the tachometer. If necessary, the combustion engine starts automatically. Parking brake To release the lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the Setting selector lever, see arrow. Pull the switch. The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set.

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 27

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Steptronic transmission, Sport and Turn signal manual mode

– On: press the lever past the resistance Sport program: point. Press the selector lever to the left out of se- – Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- lector lever position D. ance point. Manual mode: – Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction. – To shift down: press the selector lever forward. – Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down. – To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards. – Brief signaling: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light Canada: roadside parking light High beams, headlight flasher

Illuminate the vehicle on one side. Push the lever forward or pull it backward. – On: with the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the re- – High beams on, arrow 1. sistance point for approx. 2 seconds. The high beams light up when the low – Off: briefly press the lever to the resist- beams are switched on. ance point in the opposite direction. – High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

Lights and lighting – Rain sensor: position 1. – Normal wiper speed: position 2. Light functions – Fast wiper speed: position 3. Symbol Function Brief wipe and switching off Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off. Daytime running lights. Parking lights. Press the lever down. – Switching off: press the lever down until Low beams. it reaches its standard position. – Brief wipe: press the lever down from Instrument lighting. the standard position.

Rain sensor

Washer/wiper system Activating/deactivating Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position. Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. – Resting position of the wipers: position 0.

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 29

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain – Normal wiper speed: tap up once. sensor – Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield Press the lever down. – To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. – To switch off normal wipe: press down once. – Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor Pull the lever. Activating/deactivating Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain Button Function sensor Control the air flow, manual.

Control the manual air distribution.

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Windshield defroster. Cleaning the windshield Automatic climate control

Button Function Temperature.

Air conditioning. Pull the lever. Maximum cooling.

Climate control AUTO program.

Air conditioner Recirculated-air mode. Button Function Automatic recirculated-air Temperature. control AUC/recirculated- air mode. Control the air flow, manual.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode. Air distribution, manual.

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 31

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Button Function Entering the address The address can be entered in any order. Defrost and defog the windows. Example: entering the address via the town/ city Windshield defroster. 1. "City/Postal code?" Rear window defroster. 2. Enter the town/city. The list is narrowed down further with each entry. 3. Select the symbol. Infotainment 4. Select a town/city from the list. 5. If necessary, enter the street. Radio 6. Select the street as you would the town/ Control elements city. 7. If necessary, enter a house number. 8. Select the symbol. 9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance "Start guidance" If only the town/city was entered: destination guidance is started to the town/city 1 Change waveband center. 2 Changing the entertainment source 3 Sound output on/off, volume Pairing the mobile phone 4 Change station/track After the mobile phone is paired once with 5 Programmable memory buttons the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- Navigation destination entry ken instructions. 1. "My MINI" Entering a destination via address 2. "System settings" State/province 3. "Mobile devices" 1. "Navigation" 4. "Connect new device" 2. "Enter address" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is 3. "State/Province?" displayed on the Control Display. 4. Move the Controller to the right to se- 5. Select the functions for which the mo- lect the state from the list. bile phone is to be used.

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 32

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

6. To perform additional steps on the mo- Dialing a number bile phone, refer to the mobile phone 1. "Communication" owner's manual: e.g., search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new de- 2. "Dial number" vice. 3. Select the numbers individually. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- 4. Select the symbol. pears on the mobile phone display. Se- If connection is to be set up via the addi- lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. tional phone: 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control 1. Press button. number must be entered. – Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with 2. "Call via" the control number on the display of the device. Apple CarPlay preparation Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display. Concept – Enter and confirm the same control CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- number on the device and via the patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri Central Information Display (CID). voice operation and the Central Information The device is connected and displayed Display (CID). in the device list. The mobile phone is connected and will ap- Functional requirements pear at the top of the list of mobile phones. – Compatible iPhone. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. Using the phone – Corresponding mobile wireless contract. Accepting a call – Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are switched on on the iPhone. Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen- tral Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel. Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID) 1. "My MINI" "Accept" 2. "System settings" Via the button on the steering wheel 3. "Mobile devices" Press button. 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings: Via the instrument cluster – "Bluetooth®" Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept" – "Apple CarPlay"

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 33

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Pairing iPhone with CarPlay lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle. needed. Select CarPlay as the function: 1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow. "Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Refueling

Charging the vehicle

Charging socket flap 2. Remove cover of the charging cable plug, if needed. 3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station. 4. Insert the charging cable plug corresponding to the charging socket, and push it in until it engages.

Removing The charging socket flap is located on the When the vehicle is locked, the charging left side of the vehicle. cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable. Always keep charging socket clean and un- obstructed. If necessary, clean the area between charging socket flap and charging socket, for in- Keep the charging socket flap closed when stance from snow, before removing it. the charging socket is not used. 1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is locked. Connecting the charging cable Charging cable is unlocked. To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un- 2. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 34

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

Charging process is interrupted. If the tank venting has been completed, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for opening. 3. Open the fuel filler flap. If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap after tank venting, press the button again. If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler flap even after the button has been 3. Remove the charging cable from the pressed, unlock the fuel filler flap man- charging socket, arrow 2. ually. 4. Put the charging socket lid back on. Fuel cap 5. Close the charging socket flap. 1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap 6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, to open it. if needed. 7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charging cable from the port on the charging station as needed. 8. Stow the charging cable. At a charging station, insert the permanently installed charging cable in the place provided for it. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Refueling 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Tank venting In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build Gasoline up due to gasoline vapors which are dissi- For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline pated before the fuel cap is opened. should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur The switch is located in the storage com- content. partment of the driver's door. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without 1. Switch off drive-ready state. metallic additives. Information on the recommended fuel grade 2. Pull the switch to start the pres- can be found in the Owner's Manual. sure equalization. The status of the tank venting is displayed in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the tank venting can last several minutes.

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 35

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

Wheels and tires Adding engine oil

Tire inflation pressure specifications General information Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition and drive-ready state before adding engine oil.

Adding

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. – At least twice a month. – Before embarking on an extended trip. Observe the quantity to be added in the message. After correcting the tire inflation Take care not to add too much engine oil. pressure Observe recommended engine oil types. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Providing assistance Electronic oil measurement Hazard warning flashers Requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" The button is located above the Control Dis- 2. "Vehicle status" play. 3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed.

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 36

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries. 1. "MINI Connected" 2. "MINI Assist" 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance" The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis- tance is established. A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 37

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 AT A GLANCE

Cockpit ...... 40 Central Information Display (CID) ...... 44 Voice activation system ...... 53 General settings ...... 56 Owner's Manual media ...... 68 MINI eDRIVE ...... 70 Safety of the hybrid system ...... 73

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these This chapter describes all standard, country- functions and systems, the applicable laws specific and optional features offered with and regulations must be observed. the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 94 Lights off 2 Exterior mirror operation 108 Daytime running lights 163 3 Buttons of the central locking sys- Parking lights 161 tem 81 4 Lights Low beams 161 Front fog lights 164

Light switch 161

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 41

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Automatic headlight con- Canada: roadside parking trol 162 light 162 Cornering light 163 Onboard Computer 151 High-beam Assistant 163 Instrument lighting 165 7 Instrument cluster 138 8 Steering column stalk, right 5 Steering wheel buttons, left Windshield wipers 129 Camera-based cruise control on/off 191 Rain sensor 130 Cruise control on/off 198

Cleaning windows 127 Cruise control: store speed

Rear window wiper 128 Pausing, continuing cruise control Clean the rear window 128 Cruise control: increase speed

9 Steering wheel buttons, right Cruise control: reduce speed Voice activation 53

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance Telephone Camera-based cruise control: increase distance Confirm the selection 151

6 Steering column stalk, left Move selection up 151 Turn signal 125

Move selection down 151 High beams, headlight flasher 125 Increase volume High-beam Assistant 163

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

11 Adjust the steering wheel 110 14 Tank vent 261 12 Unlock hood 284 13 Operate the tailgate 85

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 305 6 PDC Park Distance Con- trol 200 Rearview camera 203 Intelligent Safety 178 Parking assistant 206 eDRIVE 120 2 Control Display 44 3 Radio/Multimedia Starting/stopping the engine, 4 Glove compartment 227 switching drive-ready state 5 Climate control 211 modes and the ignition on/ off 116 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 187 MINI Driving Modes switch 189

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 43

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

7 Steptronic transmission selector 9 Parking brake 123 lever 133 8 Controller with buttons 47 Controller with buttons 47

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, 4 Ambient light 165 SOS 306

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 96 senger airbag 170

3 Reading lights 165 6 Interior lights 165

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display

This chapter describes all standard, country- Letters and numbers specific and optional features offered with Depending on the menu, you can switch be- the series. It also describes features that are tween entering upper and lower case letters not necessarily available in your vehicle, and numbers: e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Symbol Function functions and systems. When using these or Change between capital and functions and systems, the applicable laws lower-case letters. and regulations must be observed. Insert blank space. Concept Use voice activation. Confirm entry. The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of Without navigation system switches. These functions can be operated Select the symbol. via the Controller or touchscreen. Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the Safety information choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically. WARNING Entries are continuously compared with Operating the integrated information sys- data stored in the vehicle. tems and communication devices while – Only those letters are offered during en- driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- try for which data is available. sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the systems – Destination search: place names can be or devices when the traffic situation al- entered in all languages that are availa- lows. As warranted, stop and use the sys- ble on the Control Display. tems and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Se- lecting the menu item activates or deacti- vates the function.

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 45

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Function is activated. Entertainment Function is deactivated. Symbol Meaning Status information Bluetooth audio. General information USB audio interface. The status field can be found in the upper Mobile phone audio interface. area of the Control Display. Status information is displayed in the form of symbols. Additional symbols

Radio Symbol Meaning

Symbol Meaning Check Control message. HD Radio station is being re- The sound output has been ceived. switched off. Satellite radio is switched on. Encrypted connection not active. Telephone Request for the current vehicle position. Symbol Meaning Checking the current vehicle po- Incoming or outgoing call. sition. Missed call. Split screen Signal strength of cellular network. General information Symbol flashes: network search. Additional information can be displayed on Cellular network is not available. the right side of the split screen, for instance information from the Onboard Com- Roaming is active. puter. SMS text message received. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visi- Message received. ble even when switching to another menu. Reminder. Switching the split screen on/off Sending not possible. 1. Press button. 2. "Split screen"

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Selecting the display Control Display The display can be selected in menus, where the split screen is supported. General information 1. Move the Controller to the right until To clean the Control Display, follow the care the split screen is selected. instructions, refer to page 316. 2. Press the Controller. In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to in- 3. Select the desired setting. tense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Specifying the number of displays Once the temperature is reduced, for in- It is possible to specify the number of dis- stance through shade or air conditioning, plays. the normal functions are restored.

1. Move the Controller to the right until Safety information the split screen is selected. 2. Press the Controller. NOTICE 3. "Personalize menu" Objects in the area in the front of the Con- 4. Select the desired setting. trol Display can shift and damage the Con- 5. Move the Controller to the left. trol Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display. Control elements Switching on/off automatically Overview The Control Display is switched on automatically after unlocking. In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually. 1 Control Display with touchscreen 2 Controller with buttons and, depending 1. Press button. on the equipment version, with touch- 2. "Turn off control display" pad Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 47

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Controller with navigation system Buttons on the Controller

General information Button Function The buttons can be used to open the menus Press once: call up main menu. directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Press twice: open recently used Some functions of the Central Information menus. Display (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller, refer to Open the Communication menu. page 51: Open the Media/Radio menu. Operation – Turn. Open destination input menu for navigation. Open navigation map.

Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

– Press. Controller without navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Some functions of the Central Information Display (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller, refer to – Move in four directions. page 51: Operation – Turn.

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 48

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Button Function Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

Operating with the Controller – Press. Opening the main menu Press the button.

– Move in two directions.

The main menu is displayed. All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu. Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. Buttons on the Controller 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. Button Function Press once: call up main menu. Press twice: open recently used menus. Open the Communication menu.

Open the Media/Radio menu.

2. Press the Controller.

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 49

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Changing between displays 5. "Brightness at night" After a menu item is selected, for instance 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set- "System settings", a new display appears. ting is displayed. – Move the Controller to the left. 7. Press the Controller. Closes the current display and shows the previous display. Entering letters and numbers

– Press button. Input The previous display opens. 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or – Move the Controller to the right. numbers. New display is opened. 2. : confirm entry. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. Deleting Opening recently used menus Symbol Function The recently used menus can be displayed. Press the Controller: delete letters or number. Press button twice. or Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers. Opening the Options menu Press button. Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- The "Options" menu is displayed. tries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge. The Options menu consists of various areas: – Screen settings, for instance "Split 1. Turn the Controller to the left or right screen". quickly. – Control options for the selected main All letters for which there are entries menu, for instance for "Media/Radio". are displayed on the left edge. – If applicable, further operating options 2. Select the first letter of the desired en- for the selected menu, for instance "Save try. station". The first entry of the selected letter is displayed. Changing settings Settings, such as brightness, can be entered. Operating via touchscreen 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" General information 3. "Displays" The Control Display is equipped with a 4. "Control display" touchscreen.

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 50

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use 2. Tap on symbol. any objects. Changing settings Opening the main menu Settings such as brightness can be changed Tap on symbol. via the touchscreen. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. To create the desired setting: – Slide in the selected field to the right The main menu is displayed. or left, until the desired setting is displayed. All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu. – , Tap on symbol. Selecting menu items Entering letters and numbers Tap desired menu item. Input 1. Touch the symbol on the touchscreen. A keyboard is displayed in the Control Display. 2. Enter letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function Changing between displays Tapping the symbol: delete the After a menu item is selected, a new display letter or number. opens. Tapping and holding the symbol An arrow indicates that additional displays for an extended period: delete all can be opened. letters or numbers. – Swipe to the left. – Tap arrow. Operating navigation map New display is opened. The navigation map can be moved with the touchscreen. Opening recently used menus 1. Tap on symbol.

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 51

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Function Operation sible. Where necessary, enter special characters via the Controller. Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the – To delete a character, swipe to the left map. fingers. on the touchpad. – To enter a blank space, swipe to the Touchpad right in the center of the touchpad. – To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the upper area of the touchpad. General information – To enter an underscore, swipe to the Some functions of the Central Information right in the lower area of the touchpad. Display (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller: Using the map The map in the navigation system can be Selecting functions moved via the touchpad. 1. "My MINI" Function Operation 2. "System settings" Move map. Swipe in the appropriate 3. "Touchpad" direction. 4. Select the desired function. Enlarge/ Drag in or out on the – "Speller": enter letters and numbers. shrink map. touchpad with fingers. – "Map": using the map. Display menu. Tap once. – "Search fields": write letters without selecting the list field. – "Audio feedback": pronounces en- Programmable memory but- tered letters and numbers. tons Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at General information the beginning. When entering, pay atten- The Central Information Display (CID) function to the following: tions can be stored on the programmable – The system distinguishes between up- memory buttons and called up directly, for per and lower-case letters and numbers. instance radio stations, navigation destina- To make entries, it may be necessary to tions, phone numbers and menu entries. change between upper and lower-case Settings are stored for the driver profile letters, numbers and characters, refer to currently used. page 49. – Enter characters as they are displayed Storing a function on the Control Display. 1. Select the function via the Central Infor- – Always enter associated characters, mation Display (CID). such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The set 2. Press and hold the desired but- language determines what input is pos- ton, until a signal sounds.

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 52

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Running a function Press button. The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The button assignment is displayed at the top edge of screen. Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds. 2. "OK"

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 53

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Functional requirements

This chapter describes all standard, country- Via the Control Display, set a language that specific and optional features offered with is also supported by the voice activation the series. It also describes features that are system so that the spoken commands can be not necessarily available in your vehicle, identified. e. g., due to the selected options or country To set the language, refer to page 56. versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Using the voice activation system

Concept Activating the voice activation system Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands 1. Press the button on the steering via the voice activation system. The system wheel. supports you with announcements during 2. Wait for the signal. input. 3. Say the command. This symbol in the instrument cluster General information indicates that the voice activation system is active. – Functions that can only be used when No other commands may be available. In the vehicle is stationary can only be op- this case, operate the function via the Cen- erated via the voice activation system to tral Information Display (CID). a limited extent. – The system uses a special microphone Terminating the voice activation on the driver's side. system – ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- Press the button on the steering bal instructions to use with the voice ac- wheel or ›Cancel‹. tivation system. – Say the commands, numbers, and letters Using a smartphone via voice smoothly and with normal volume, em- activation phasis, and speed. A smartphone connected to the vehicle can – Always say commands in the language be used via voice activation. of the voice activation system.

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 54

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Activate voice command response on the Help on the voice activation system smartphone for this purpose. – To have information on the operating principle of the voice activation system 1. Press and hold the button on read out loud: ›General information on the steering wheel for approx. 3 sec- voice control‹. onds. – To have help for the current menu read Voice command response is activated on out loud: ›Help‹. the smartphone. 2. Release the button. Example: opening the tone set- If activation is successful, a confirmation appears on the Control Display. tings If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices The commands of the menu items are spo- appears on the Control Display. ken just as they are selected via the Con- troller. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out- Possible commands put, if needed.

General information 2. Press button on the steering wheel. Most menu items on the Control Display can 3. ›Media and radio‹ be voiced as commands. Commands from other menus can also be 4. ›Tone‹ spoken. You may select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read these Settings list entries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list. Setting the voice dialog You can set the system to use standard dia- Displaying possible commands log or a short version. The following is displayed in the top area of The short version of the voice dialog plays the Control Display: back short messages in abbreviated form. – Some possible commands for the current 1. "My MINI" menu. – Some possible commands from other 2. "System settings" menus. 3. "Language" – Status of the voice recognition. 4. "Speech mode:" – Encrypted connection is not availa- 5. Select the desired setting. ble.

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 55

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

Activating voice recognition via Adjusting the volume the server The voice recognition feature via the server Turn the volume button during the spoken provides a dictation function and a natural instructions until the desired volume is set. method of entering destinations while im- – The volume remains constant even if the proving the quality of voice recognition. To volume of other audio sources is use the functions, data is transmitted to a changed. service provider via an encrypted connec- – The volume is stored for the profile cur- tion and stored locally there. rently used. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" Information on Emergency 3. "Language" Requests 4. "Server speech recognition"

Speaking during voice output Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful It is possible to answer during inquiries of situations, the voice and vocal pitch can the voice activation system. The function change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- can be deactivated if inquiries are often un- tablishment of a phone connection. desirably interrupted, for instance due to Instead, use the SOS button, refer to background noise or talking. page 306, close to the interior mirror. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" Environmental conditions 3. "Language" 4. "Speaking during voice output" – Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed to prevent noise interference. Setting the language – Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. The language to be used for voice activation and system announcements can be set. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Language:" 5. Select the desired language.

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 56

AT A GLANCE General settings

General settings

Vehicle features and options 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time zone:" This chapter describes all standard, country- 5. Select the desired setting. specific and optional features offered with The setting is stored for the driver profile the series. It also describes features that are currently used. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Setting the time functions and systems. When using these Via the Central Information Display (CID): functions and systems, the applicable laws 1. "My MINI" and regulations must be observed. 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" Language 4. "Time:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired Setting the language hours are displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 6. Press the Controller. 1. "My MINI" 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi- 2. "System settings" nutes are displayed. 3. "Language" 8. Press the Controller. 4. "Language:" Setting the time format 5. Select the desired setting. Via the Central Information Display (CID): The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" Setting the voice dialog 3. "Date and time" Voice dialog for the voice activation system, 4. "Time format:" refer to page 54. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile Time currently used.

Setting the time zone Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 57

General settings AT A GLANCE

Date 4. Select the desired menu item. 5. Select the desired setting. Setting the date The setting is stored for the driver profile Via the Central Information Display (CID): currently used. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" Activating/deactivating the 3. "Date and time" display of the current vehicle 4. "Date:" position 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed. Concept 6. Press the Controller. If vehicle location has been activated, the 7. Make the settings for the month and current vehicle position can be displayed in year. the MINI Connected app. Setting the date format Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Date and time" 3. "Vehicle tracking" 4. "Date format:" 4. "Vehicle tracking" 5. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Activating/deactivating popup windows Setting the units of measurement For some functions, popup windows are displayed automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be acti- You can set the units of measurement for vated or deactivated. some values, for example, fuel consumption, distances and temperature. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 2. "System settings" 3. "Pop-ups" 3. "Units" 4. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 58

AT A GLANCE General settings

Control Display Messages

Brightness Concept Via the Central Information Display (CID): The menu centrally displays all messages ar- riving in the vehicle in list form. 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" General information 3. "Displays" The following messages can be displayed: 4. "Control display" – Traffic messages. 5. "Brightness at night" – Check Control messages. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired – Communication messages, for example brightness is set. e-mails, SMS text messages or remind- 7. Press the Controller. ers. – Service requirements messages. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Messages are additionally displayed in the status field. Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visible. Retrieving messages Via the Central Information Display (CID): Screensaver 1. "Notifications" If no entries are made via the Central Infor- 2. Select the desired message. mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time. The respective menu is opened, where the message is displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Deleting messages 2. "System settings" All messages, except Check Control mes- 3. "Displays" sages, can be deleted from the list. Check Control messages are displayed as long as 4. "Control display" they are relevant. 5. "Screensaver" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 6. Select the desired setting. 1. "Notifications" The setting is stored for the driver profile 2. Select the desired message. currently used. 3. Press button. 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications" Settings The following settings can be adjusted:

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 59

General settings AT A GLANCE

– Select the applications, from which mes- Deleting personal data in the sages will be permitted. vehicle – Sort the messages according to date or priority. Concept Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores 1. "My MINI" personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently de- 2. "System settings" leted via the Central Information Display 3. "Notifications" (CID). 4. Select the desired setting. General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Data protection following data is deleted: – Driver profile settings. Data transfer – Stored radio stations. – Stored programmable memory buttons. Concept – Travel and Onboard Computer informa- The vehicle offers various functions which tion. require data to be transferred to MINI or a – Music collection. service provider. The data transfer can be – Navigation, for instance stored destina- deactivated for some functions. tions. General information – Phone book. With data transfer deactivated, the respec- – Office data, for instance voice notes. tive function cannot be used. – Login accounts. Only make these settings while stationary. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes. Activating/deactivating the data transfer Functional requirement Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- Data can only be deleted while stationary. play. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Deleting data Heed and follow the instructions on the 1. Switch on the ignition. Control Display. 2. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "System settings" 1. Switch on the ignition. 4. "Data privacy" 2. "My MINI" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "System settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. "Delete personal data"

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 60

AT A GLANCE General settings

6. "Delete personal data" Function Connec- 7. "OK" tion type 8. Exit and lock the vehicle. Using compatible apps via Bluetooth After 15 minutes, the deletion process is the Central Information Dis- or USB. completed. play (CID). If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the USB storage device: USB. deletion. Exporting and importing driver profiles. Canceling deletion Performing software up- Start the engine to cancel deletion of the dates. data. Playing music. Playing videos from the USB. Connections smartphone or the USB storage device. Concept Using Apple CarPlay apps Bluetooth via the Central Information and WiFi. Various connection types are available for Display (CID) and voice op- using mobile devices in the vehicle. The eration. connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function. The following connection types require one- General information time pairing with the vehicle: – Bluetooth. The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types – Apple CarPlay for them. The scope of functions depends on Paired devices are automatically recognized the mobile device. later on and connected to the vehicle. Function Connec- tion type Safety information Making calls via the hands- Bluetooth. free system. WARNING Using phone functions via Operating the integrated information sys- the Central Information Dis- tems and communication devices while play (CID). driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is Using the smartphone Of- a risk of an accident. Only use the systems fice functions. or devices when the traffic situation al- Playing music from the Bluetooth lows. As warranted, stop and use the sys- smartphone or the audio or USB. tems and devices while the vehicle is sta- player. tionary.

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 61

General settings AT A GLANCE

Compatible devices Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID): General information 1. "My MINI" Information on mobile devices compatible with the vehicle can be found at www.mini- 2. "System settings" usa.com/bluetooth. 3. "Mobile devices" Malfunctions may occur with devices not 4. "Settings" listed or deviating software versions. 5. "Bluetooth®" Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number Activating/deactivating telephone functions When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification To use all supported functions of a mobile number and the software part number. phone, the following functions must be acti- These numbers can be displayed in the ve- vated prior to pairing. hicle. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 4. "Settings" 5. Select desired setting: 5. "Bluetooth® info" – "Office" 6. "System information" Activate function to transmit short messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, A software update, refer to page 66, can notes, and reminders to the vehicle. be performed, if needed. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle. Bluetooth connection – "Contact images" Functional requirements Activate function to show the contact pictures. – Compatible device, refer to page 61, with Bluetooth interface. 6. Move the Controller to the left. – The remote control is in the vehicle. Pairing the mobile device with the – The device is ready for operation. vehicle – Bluetooth is activated on the device and Via the Central Information Display (CID): in the vehicle, refer to page 61. – Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibil- 1. "My MINI" ity, may be required on the device; refer 2. "System settings" to the owner's manual of the device. 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Connect new device"

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 62

AT A GLANCE General settings

5. Select the functions for which the de- – There are too many Bluetooth devices vice will be used: connected to the mobile phone or vehi- – "Telephone" cle. – "Bluetooth® audio" In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices. – "Apps" Delete all known Bluetooth connections – "Apple CarPlay" from the device list on the mobile phone The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is and start a new device search. displayed on the Control Display. – The mobile phone is in power-save mode 6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vi- or has only a limited remaining battery cinity of the mobile device. life. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- Charge mobile phone. pears on the mobile device display. Why does the mobile phone no longer re- Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- act? cle. – The applications on the mobile phone do 7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- not function anymore. trol number is displayed or the control Switch the mobile phone off and on number must be entered. again. – Compare the control number dis- – Possibly too high or too low ambient played on the Control Display with temperatures for mobile phone opera- the control number on the display of tion. the device. Do not subject the mobile phone to ex- Confirm the control number on the treme ambient temperatures. device and on the Control Display. Why can phone functions not be used via – Enter and confirm the same control the Central Information Display (CID)? number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID). – The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth au- The device is connected and displayed dio device. in the device list. Connect the mobile phone with the tele- If connection was not successful: Fre- phone or additional phone function. quently Asked Questions, refer to page 62. Why are no or not all phone book entries Frequently asked questions displayed or why are they incomplete? – Transmission of the phone book entries All requirements are met and all required is not yet complete. steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not – It is possible that only the phone book function as expected. entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted. In this case, the following explanations can help: – It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters. Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? – It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 63

General settings AT A GLANCE

– The number of phone book entries to be – Playing music files via USB audio. stored is too high. – Playing videos via USB video. – Data volume of the contact too large, for – Loading of software updates, refer to instance due to stored information such page 66. as notes. Follow the following when connecting: Reduce the data volume of the contact. – Do not use force when plugging the con- – A mobile phone is only connected as an nector into the USB interface. audio source. – Use a flexible adapter cable. Reconfigure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional – Protect the USB storage device against phone function. mechanical damage. How can the phone connection quality be – Due to the large number of USB media improved? available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable – The strength of the Bluetooth signal on on the vehicle. the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone. – Do not expose USB media to extreme environmental conditions, such as very – Insert mobile phone into the wireless high temperatures; refer to the owner's charging tray. manual of the device. – Adjust the volume of the microphone – Due to the many different compression and loudspeakers separately. techniques, proper playback of the me- If all points in this list have been checked dia stored on the USB storage device and the required function is still not availa- cannot be guaranteed in all cases. ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service – A connected USB storage device will be center or another qualified service center or supplied with charging current via the repair shop. USB interface if the device supports this. USB connection – To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage General information device via the onboard socket, when it Mobile devices with a USB port are con- is connected to the USB interface. nected to the USB interface. – Depending on how the USB storage de- – Mobile phones. vice is being used, settings may be re- – Audio devices with USB port, for in- quired on the USB storage device, refer stance MP3 player. to the owner's manual of the device. – USB storage devices. Not compatible USB media: Common file systems are supported. – USB hard drives. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended – USB hubs. formats. – USB memory card readers with multiple The following applications are possible: inserts. – Exporting and importing driver profiles, – HFS-formatted USB media. refer to page 89. – Devices such as fans or lamps.

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 64

AT A GLANCE General settings

Functional requirement "Apple CarPlay" Compatible device, refer to page 61, with The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and USB interface. displayed in the device list, refer to page 65. Connecting the device Connect the USB storage device using a Operation suitable adapter cable to a USB interface, For more information, refer to the refer to page 226. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle or The USB storage device is connected to the the printed Owner's Manual for navigation, vehicle and displayed in the device list. entertainment, communication. Apple CarPlay preparation Frequently asked questions All requirements are met and all required Concept steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- function as expected. patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information In this case, the following explanations can Display (CID). help: The iPhone has already been paired with Functional requirements Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is – Compatible iPhone, refer to page 61. established, CarPlay can no longer be selected. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. – Delete the iPhone concerned from the – Corresponding mobile wireless contract. device list. – Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera- – On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- tion are switched on on the iPhone. cerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under WiFi. Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay – Pair the iPhone as a new device. Via the Central Information Display (CID): If the steps listed have been carried out and 1. "My MINI" the required function is still not available: 2. "System settings" contact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair 3. "Mobile devices" shop. 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings: Managing mobile devices – "Bluetooth®" General information – "Apple CarPlay" – After one-time pairing, the devices are automatically recognized and recon- Pairing iPhone with CarPlay nected when the ignition is switched on. Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 61, via Bluetooth Select CarPlay as the function:

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 65

General settings AT A GLANCE

– The data stored on the SIM card or in Disconnecting the device the mobile phone are transferred to the The connection of the device to the vehicle vehicle after recognition. is disconnected. – For some devices, certain settings may The device remains paired and can be con- be necessary, for instance authorization, nected again, refer to page 65. see owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Displaying the device list 1. "My MINI" All devices paired and/or connected with 2. "System settings" the vehicle are displayed in the device list. 3. "Mobile devices" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Select device. 1. "My MINI" 5. "Disconnect device" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" Connecting the device A symbol indicates, for which function a de- A disconnected device can be reconnected. vice is used. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Symbol Function 1. "My MINI" "Telephone" 2. "System settings" "Additional telephone" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. "Bluetooth® audio" 5. "Connect device" "Apps" The functions that were assigned to the de- "Apple CarPlay" vice before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. If the de- Configuring the device vice is already connected, these functions are deactivated. Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select the desired device. 4. Select device. 5. Select the desired setting. 5. "Delete device" If a function is assigned to a device, the The device is disconnected and removed function will be deactivated where appro- from the device list. priate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 66

AT A GLANCE General settings

Swapping the telephone and additional Updating software via USB phone The software may only be updated when the If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle is stationary. vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad- Via the Central Information Display (CID): ditional phone can be switched. 1. Store the file for the software update in Via the Central Information Display (CID): the main directory of a USB flash drive. 1. "My MINI" 2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB 2. "System settings" interface. 3. "Mobile devices" 3. "My MINI" 4. "Settings" 4. "System settings" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 5. "Software update" 6. "Update software" Software update 7. "USB" General information 8. "Install software" The vehicle supports a large number of mo- 9. "OK" bile devices, for instance mobile phones and 10. Wait for the update to complete. MP3 players. Software updates are available 11. Confirm system restart. for many of the supported devices. The vehicle is maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates. Restoring the software version Updates and related current information is The software version before the last soft- available on the Internet at www.mini.com/ ware update and the version before the first update. software update can be restored. The software may only be restored when Displaying the installed software the vehicle is stationary. version Via the Central Information Display (CID): The software version installed in the vehicle 1. "My MINI" is displayed. 2. "System settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Software update" 1. "My MINI" 4. "Restore software" 2. "System settings" 5. – "Previous version" 3. "Software update" The previous software version is re- 4. "Show current version" stored. If an update has been carried out before, se- – "Default software settings" lect the desired version to display additional The first software version is re- information. stored. 6. "Remove software" 7. "OK"

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 67

General settings AT A GLANCE

8. Wait for restore. 9. Confirm system restart.

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 68

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the instructions of the Supple- This chapter describes all standard, country- mentary Owner's Manuals, which are in- specific and optional features offered with cluded in addition to the onboard literature. the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country Integrated Owner's Manual in versions. This also applies to safety-related the vehicle functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Concept The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in General information the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual: Selecting the Owner's Manual – Printed Owner's Manual, refer to 1. Press button. page 68. – Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- 2. "My MINI" cle, refer to page 68. 3. "Owner's Manual" 4. Select the required method of accessing the contents. Printed Owner's Manual Scrolling through the owner's Concept manual The printed Owner's Manual describes all Turn the Controller, until the next or previ- standard, country-specific, and optional fea- ous contents are displayed. tures offered with the series. Context help General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- General information tainment, and Communication can be ob- The section of the Owner's Manual relating tained as printed book from the service cen- to the function that is currently selected ter. can be displayed directly.

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 69

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

Opening via Central Information Programmable memory buttons Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from General information the function on the Control Display: The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called 1. Press button. up directly. 2. "Owner's Manual" Storing Opening when a Check Control 1. Select the desired entry point via the message is displayed Central Information Display (CID): Directly from the Check Control message on – "Quick reference" the Control Display: – "Search by pictures" "Owner's Manual" – "Keyword search" – "Animations" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual 2. Press and hold the desired but- To switch from a function, for instance ton, until a signal sounds. radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two Executing displays: Press button. The Owner's Manual is displayed 1. Press the button. immediately. 2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 70

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

MINI eDRIVE

Vehicle features and options The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 252, via the charging socket at charging stations or household sockets. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are Overview not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hybrid system 1 Combustion engine Concept 2 Control-system electronics, electric mo- This MINI is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to tor the combustion engine, the vehicle features 3 Electric motor a high-voltage system that consists of an 4 High-voltage cables: orange electric motor and a high-voltage battery among other things. 5 High-voltage battery The hybrid system can move the vehicle 6 Charging socket purely electrically. It can also support the 7 Vehicle battery combustion engine in certain situations. Functions while driving General information The vehicle does not consume any fuel Electric driving: ePOWER. while driving purely electrically. This ena- Under certain conditions, refer to page 120, bles environmentally friendly driving with- the vehicle is powered only by the electric out emissions in inner-city traffic. If the motor. combustion engine is used, the hybrid system support reduces fuel consumption even further. Variable drive type In addition to this, the electric motor acts as The combustion engine drives the front axle an alternator: during braking and coasting, and the electric motor the rear axle. De- the electric motor converts the vehicle's ki- pending on the operating condition, the ve- netic energy into electrical energy. The hicle has the options of front-wheel drive, electrical energy is stored in the high-volt- rear-wheel drive or bundled for four-wheel age battery and is used to drive the electric drive. motor.

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 71

MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE

Follow the information about electric driv- Charging the vehicle ing ePOWER, driving with the combustion The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can engine POWER, and the driving stability be charged, refer to page 252, via the control systems. charging socket at charging stations or household sockets. Assistance from the electric motor Regular and complete charging of the high- Driving off and accelerating require a lot of voltage battery reduces the fuel consump- energy. tion by using electric energy. To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel consumption, the electric motor boosts the Climate control while parking and combustion engine, refer to page 123. To charging do this, the electric motor uses the energy saved in the high-voltage battery. The hybrid system makes it possible to operate the automatic climate control prior to Driving with the combustion engine: driving off and with the combustion engine POWER switched off. The combustion engine, refer to page 122, During vehicle charging or if the high-volt- provides the main drive power to move the age battery is sufficiently charged, the car's vehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage bat- interior can be can be cooled or heated in tery is charged at the same time. advance of the trip, refer to page 259. The hybrid system always starts the com- The stationary climate control can also be bustion engine automatically. switched on directly.

Auto Start/Stop function, coasting Display The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to The displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 119, switches the combustion engine page 139, provide information about the off while the vehicle is moving, when brak- current state of hybrid operation. ing, when rolling to a halt, and while the vehicle is stopped. The condition of rolling Energy-saving driving with the combustion engine switched off is To save energy while driving, read the fol- referred to as coasting. Convenience func- lowing descriptions: tions such as the automatic climate control – Saving fuel, refer to page 245. are supplied by the high-voltage battery and can remain switched on. – Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to page 246. Energy recovery: CHARGE – GREEN Mode. The high-voltage battery of the hybrid sys- – Adapting to the course of the road. tem is charged through energy recovery while driving. Safety of the hybrid system The electric motor acts as a generator and Follow the information on safety, refer to converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle page 73. into electrical energy, refer to page 123.

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 72

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

Long-term vehicle storage Observe the information on vehicle storage and for longer idle periods, refer to page 316.

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 73

Safety of the hybrid system AT A GLANCE

Safety of the hybrid system

Vehicle features and options Contact with water

This chapter describes all standard, country- The hybrid system is typically safe even in specific and optional features offered with the following example situations: the series. It also describes features that are – Water in the footwell, for instance after not necessarily available in your vehicle, a rainstorm when sunroof was kept e. g., due to the selected options or country open. versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these – Vehicle is in water but only up to the al- functions and systems, the applicable laws lowed height. and regulations must be observed. – Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Working on the hybrid system Automatic deactivation

General information If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is switched off automatically to prevent risk of The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- danger to occupants and other road users. mends that no changes be made to the vehicle, for instance the retrofitting of accesso- Read the information on What to do after ries, that will have an effect on the vehicle’s an accident, refer to page 311. hybrid system. Safety information

DANGER Improperly executed work, in particular maintenance and repair on the high-voltage system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the work on the vehicle, in particular maintenance and repair, be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 CONTROLS

Opening and closing ...... 76 Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ...... 99 Transporting children safely ...... 111 Driving ...... 116 Displays ...... 138 Lights ...... 161 Safety ...... 167 Driving stability control systems ...... 187 Driving comfort ...... 191 Climate control ...... 211 Interior equipment ...... 220 Storage compartments ...... 227 Cargo area ...... 230

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 76

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING specific and optional features offered with People or animals in the vehicle can lock the series. It also describes features that are the doors from the inside and lock them- not necessarily available in your vehicle, selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot e. g., due to the selected options or country be opened from the outside. There is a risk versions. This also applies to safety-related of injury. Take the remote control with functions and systems. When using these you so that the vehicle can be opened from functions and systems, the applicable laws the outside. and regulations must be observed.

Remote control WARNING Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. General information Persons who spend a lengthy time in the The vehicle is supplied with two remote vehicle while being exposed to extreme controls with integrated key. temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Each remote control contains a replaceable Do not lock the vehicle from the outside battery. Replacing the battery, refer to when there are people in it. page 79. You may set the button functions, depending on the vehicle equipment and country WARNING version. Settings, refer to page 91. Unattended children or animals can cause The vehicle stores personal settings for ev- the vehicle to move and endanger them- ery remote control. Driver profile, refer to selves and traffic, for instance due to the page 89. following actions: The remote controls hold information about – Pressing the Start/Stop button. required maintenance. Service data in the – Releasing the parking brake. remote control, refer to page 292. – Opening and closing the doors or To prevent possible locking in of the remote windows. control, take the remote control with you when exiting the vehicle. – Engaging selector lever position N. – Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 77

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Overview – The interior lights, refer to page 165, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually. – Depending on the settings, the welcome light and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to page 162, are switched on. – Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open. – The alarm system, refer to page 93, is 1 Unlocking switched off. 2 Locking The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. 3 Unlocking the tailgate With automatic tailgate operation: open Convenient opening the tailgate Press and hold this button on the 4 Panic mode remote control after unlocking. Unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote Press the button on the remote con- control is pressed. trol. Depending on the settings, refer to Locking page 91, the following access points are 1. Close the driver's door. unlocked. – Driver's door. 2. Press button on the remote control. Press the button on the remote control again to unlock the other vehicle access The following functions are executed: points. – All doors and the tailgate are locked. – All doors and tailgate. – Locking is confirmed by the turn signals In addition, the following functions are exe- and the horn. This function must be ac- cuted: tivated in the settings, refer to page 91. – Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be – The alarm system, refer to page 93, is activated in the settings, refer to switched on. page 91. If the drive-ready state is still switched on – The settings stored in the driver profile, when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn refer to page 89, are applied. honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the – The driver's seat is set to the last posi- Start/Stop button. tion saved in the driver's profile. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 91.

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 78

CONTROLS Opening and closing

With Comfort Access: convenient Depending on the vehicle equipment and closing country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be operated with Safety information the remote control and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. Adjust the settings, refer to page 91. WARNING With convenient closing, body parts can Safety information be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the WARNING doors is clear during convenient closing. Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make Closing sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. Press and hold this button on the remote control in the area close to the vehicle. NOTICE The windows and the glass sunroof are The tailgate swings back and up when it closed, as long as the button on the remote opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- control is pressed. erty. Make sure that the area of movement The exterior mirrors are folded in. of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. Switch on interior lights and courtesy light NOTICE Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- The MINI logo projection is also switched ing. There is a risk of damage to property. on. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed These functions are not available if the inte- objects do not hit the windows. rior lights were switched off manually. The light functions may depend on the am- Opening bient brightness. Press and hold the button on the re- After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- mote control for approx. 1 second. ing the button again. Without automatic tailgate operation: Tailgate The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward. General information With automatic tailgate operation: To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not The tailgate opens automatically. place the remote control in the cargo area.

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 79

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Panic mode 4. Push battery in the direction of the ar- You can trigger the alarm system if you find row using a pointed object and lift it yourself in a dangerous situation. out. – Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds. – Briefly press the button on the remote control three times in succession. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Replacing the battery 1. Remove the integrated key from the re- 5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the mote control, refer to page 81. positive side facing up. 2. Slide the integrated key into the open- 6. Insert lid and cover. ing and raise the cover. 7. Push the integrated key into the remote The battery compartment is accessible. control until it engages. Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional remote controls Additional remote controls are available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the Loss of the remote controls cover. A lost remote control can be blocked and replaced by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Malfunction

General information A Check Control message is displayed. Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 80

CONTROLS Opening and closing

– The battery of the remote control is dis- It is not possible to switch on the drive- charged. Replacing the battery, refer to ready state if the remote control has not page 79. been detected. – Interference of the radio connection Proceed as follows in this case: from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting 1. Hold the remote control as shown power. against the marked area on the steering column. Pay attention to the display in – Shielding of the remote control due to the instrument cluster. metal objects. 2. If the remote control is detected: Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 seconds. – Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic If the remote control is not detected, devices in direct proximity to the re- slightly change the position of the remote mote control. control and repeat the procedure. Do not transport the remote control together with electronic devices. Frequently asked questions – Interference of radio transmission by a What precautions can be taken to be able to charging process of mobile devices, for open a vehicle with an accidentally locked instance charging of a mobile phone. in remote control? – The remote control is in direct proximity – The options provided by the Remote of the wireless charging tray. Services of the MINI Connected app include the ability to lock and unlock a ve- Place the remote control down at a dif- hicle. ferent location. This requires an active MINI Connected In the case of interference, the vehicle can contract and the MINI Connected app be unlocked and locked from the outside must be installed on a smartphone. with the integrated key, refer to page 80. – Unlocking the vehicle can be requested Switching on the drive-ready state via via the MINI Connected Call Center. emergency detection of the remote An active MINI Connected contract is control required.

Integrated key

General information The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without remote control using the integrated key.

It is not possible to start the engine if the remote control has not been detected.

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 81

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Safety information To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid. WARNING Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the NOTICE integrated key. The door lock is permanently joined with The other doors must be unlocked or locked the door. The door handle can be moved. from the inside. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a Alarm system risk of damage to property. Remove the The alarm system is not switched on if the integrated key before pulling the outside vehicle is locked with the integrated key. door handle. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock. In order to stop Removing this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 79.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2. In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on. Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock.

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 82

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Overview All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. General information Comfort Access supports the following functions: Buttons for the central locking system. – Unlocking and locking the vehicle. – Convenient closing. Locking – Open the tailgate. Press the button with the front – Opening/closing the tailgate with no- doors closed. touch activation. This function must be activated in the The vehicle is not secured against theft settings, refer to page 91. when locking. Functional requirements Unlocking – To lock the vehicle, the remote control Press button. must be located outside of the vehicle near the doors. – The next unlocking and locking cycle is Opening not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. – Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle Unlocking above the armrest. – Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked. – Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

On the driver's or front passenger's outer Comfort Access door handle, press the button. Concept Depending on the settings, refer to page 91, only the driver's door may be un- The vehicle can be accessed without acti- locked. Unlike when unlocking with the re- vating the remote control.

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 83

Opening and closing CONTROLS

mote control, pressing the button on the Closing outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again. If a door of a locked vehicle was opened from the inside via the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle first locks the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door handle must be pressed again. This is the case whether the vehicle was Press and hold down the button on the driv- locked automatically after driving off or via er's or front passenger's outer door handle. the central locking system button from the inside. In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed. Locking The exterior mirrors are folded in. Opening the tailgate

General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

On the driver's or front passenger's outer Safety information door handle, press the button. WARNING Convenient closing Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make Safety information sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. WARNING With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make NOTICE sure that the area of movement of the The tailgate swings back and up when it doors is clear during convenient closing. opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 84

CONTROLS Opening and closing

vertently by an unconscious or alleged rec- NOTICE ognized foot movement. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the The sensor has an approximate range of windows and heat conductors while driv- 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the ing. There is a risk of damage to property. vehicle. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti- objects do not hit the windows. vation, locked doors are not unlocked. Contactless opening and closing of the tail- Opening gate must be activated in the settings. Safety information

WARNING During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas system. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle. Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation: WARNING The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung Body parts can be jammed when operating upward. the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make With automatic tailgate operation: sure that the area of movement of the tail- The tailgate opens automatically. gate is clear during opening and closing. Opening and closing the split doors with no-touch activation NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it Concept opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement The tailgate can be opened and closed with of the tailgate is clear during opening and no-touch activation using the remote con- closing. trol you are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the central rear area and the tailgate is opened or Settings closed. 1. "My MINI" General information 2. "Vehicle settings" To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not 3. "Doors/Key" place the remote control in the cargo area. 4. "Tailgate" If the remote control is in the sensor area, 5. Select desired setting: the tailgate can be opened or closed inad-

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 85

Opening and closing CONTROLS

– "Open by foot movement" motion, and moving it one more time after Contactless opening of the tailgate is that will open the tailgate. switched on or off. – "Close by foot movement" Malfunction Contactless closing of the tailgate is Remote control detection by the vehicle switched on or off. may malfunction under the following circumstances: Performing the foot movement – The battery of the remote control is discharged. Replacing the battery, refer to 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle page 79. at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle. – Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- equipment with high transmitting rection of travel and immediately pull it power. back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors. – Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects. – Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control together with electronic devices. Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the Opening locking request recognition function on the Perform the foot movement described ear- door handles. lier. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and Before the opening, the hazard warning sys- lock the vehicle using the buttons of the re- tem flashes. mote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 80. When the touchless closing is switched on: moving your foot again will stop the opening motion, and moving it one more time after that will close the tailgate. Tailgate

Closing General information Perform the foot movement described ear- To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not lier. place the remote control in the cargo area. Before closing, the hazard warning system Depending on the vehicle equipment and flashes and an acoustic signal sounds. country version, it is possible to specify When the touchless opening is switched on: whether the tailgate can be operated with moving your foot again will stop the closing the remote control and how the vehicle

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 86

CONTROLS Opening and closing

doors will respond to this. Adjust the set- With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- tings, refer to page 91. cle or have the remote control with you. Press button next on tailgate. Safety information – Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 sec- WARNING ond. Body parts can be jammed when operating Depending on the setting, the doors may the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re- sure that the area of movement of the tail- mote control, refer to page 78. gate is clear during opening and closing. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

NOTICE Opening from the inside The tailgate swings back and up when it With Steptronic transmission: opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- With the vehicle stationary, pull the erty. Make sure that the area of movement button in the storage compartment of the of the tailgate is clear during opening and driver's door upwards. closing. If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

NOTICE With manual transmission: Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the With the vehicle stationary, pull the windows and heat conductors while driv- button in the storage compartment of the ing. There is a risk of damage to property. driver's door upwards twice in quick suc- Cover the edges and ensure that pointed cession. objects do not hit the windows. Closing Without automatic tailgate operation

Opening from the outside

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 87

Opening and closing CONTROLS

With automatic tailgate operation If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening Opening height.

Adjusting the opening height From the inside You can set how far the tailgate should With Steptronic transmission: open. Pull button in the storage compart- When adjusting the opening height, ensure ment of the driver's door upward. that there is a clearance of at least If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. tion P must be engaged first. Via the Central Information Display (CID): With manual transmission: 1. "My MINI" With the vehicle stationary, pull the 2. "Vehicle settings" button in the storage compartment of the 3. "Doors/Key" driver's door upwards twice in quick succession. 4. "Tailgate" 5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opening height. opens automatically to the adjusted opening height. From the outside Interruption of the opening procedure The opening procedure is interrupted in the following situations: – When the vehicle starts moving. – By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate. – By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the – Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. tailgate. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- – By pressing the button on the remote cle or have the remote control with you. control. Pressing again continues the Press the button on tailgate's exterior. opening motion. – By pressing or pulling the button in the – Press and hold button on the re- storage compartment of the driver's mote control for approx. 1 sec- door. Pulling again continues the open- ond. ing motion. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re- Closing mote control, refer to page 78. From the outside Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 88

CONTROLS Opening and closing

From the inside Interruption of the closing procedure Press and hold the button in the stor- The closing procedure is interrupted in the age compartment of the driver's door. following situations: – If the vehicle starts off with a jerky The remote control must be located in the movement. car's interior for this function. – By pressing the button on the outside of An acoustic signal sounds before the tail- the tailgate. Pressing again closes the gate is closed. tailgate. From inside the tailgate – By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the Without Comfort Access: tailgate. – By releasing the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Press- ing again and holding continues the closing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information

Press button on the inside of the tailgate. WARNING With Comfort Access: With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not operate the tailgate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual operation – Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with the tailgate. a slow and smooth motion. – Press button, arrow 2. To close the tailgate fully, press down The vehicle will be locked after closing lightly only. Closing occurs automatically. the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the remote control must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 89

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Driver profile – The driver is only carrying his or her own remote control. Concept – The driver unlocks the vehicle. – The driver gets into the vehicle through In the driver profiles, individual settings for the driver's door. several drivers can be stored and called up again when required. Settings General information The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile. There are three driver profiles with which The scope of storable settings depends on personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev- country and equipment. ery remote control has one of these driver profiles assigned. – Unlocking and locking. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote – Lights. control, the assigned personal driver profile – Radio. will be activated. All settings stored in the – Instrument cluster. driver profile are automatically applied. – Programmable memory buttons. If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal set- – Volumes, tone. tings during unlocking. These settings are – Control Display. also restored, if the vehicle has been used in – Climate control. the meantime by a person with a different – Navigation. remote control. – PDC Park Distance Control. Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently acti- – Rearview camera. vated. – Head-up Display. If another driver profile is selected via the – MINI Driving Modes. Central Information Display (CID), the set- – Intelligent Safety. tings stored in it will be applied automati- – Driver's seat position, exterior mirror cally. The new driver profile is assigned to position. the remote control currently used. Both the positions saved via the seat There is an additional guest profile available memory and the last position set are that is not assigned to any remote control: it saved. can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles. Profile management Functional requirements Selecting a driver profile For the system to be able to identify the Regardless of the remote control in use, a driver profile associated to a particular different driver profile may be activated. driver, the detected remote control must be This allows you to call up personal vehicle clearly allocated to the driver. settings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own remote control. This is the case when:

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 90

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. Enter profile name. 1. "My MINI" 6. Select the symbol. 2. "Driver profiles" Resetting a driver profile 3. Select driver profile. The settings of the driver profile currently 4. "OK" in use are reset to their factory settings. – All settings stored in the called-up Via the Central Information Display (CID): driver profile are automatically applied. 1. "My MINI" – The called-up driver profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the 2. "Driver profiles" time. 3. Select driver profile. – If the driver profile is already assigned The driver profile marked with this to a different remote control, this driver symbol can be reset. profile will apply to both remote con- 4. "Reset driver profile" trols. 5. "OK" Using a guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings Exporting driver profiles that are stored in none of the three personal Most settings of the active driver profile driver profiles. can be exported. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving personal settings, for instance be- 1. "My MINI" fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop. 2. "Driver profiles" The stored driver profiles can be taken into 3. "Drive off (guest)" another vehicle. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. "OK" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is 1. "My MINI" not assigned to the current remote control. 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. Renaming a driver profile The driver profile marked with this A personal name can be assigned to the ac- symbol can be exported. tive driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles. 4. "Export driver profile (USB)" Via the Central Information Display (CID): Select USB storage device as needed. 1. "My MINI" Importing driver profiles 2. "Driver profiles" Profiles stored on a USB storage device can 3. Select driver profile. be imported via the USB interface. The driver profile marked with this The existing settings of the active driver symbol can be renamed. profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile. 4. "Change driver profile name"

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 91

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Via the Central Information Display (CID): Settings 1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" General information 3. Select the driver profile to overwrite. Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the The driver profile marked with this remote control functions. symbol can be overwritten. These settings are stored for the driver pro- 4. "Import driver profile (USB)" file, refer to page 89, currently used. Select USB storage device as needed. 5. Select the driver profile to be imported. Unlocking

Displaying driver profiles during start Doors The driver profiles can be displayed during Via the Central Information Display (CID): each start to select the desired profile. 1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "Vehicle settings" 1. "My MINI" 3. "Doors/Key" 2. "Driver profiles" 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 3. "Show driver profiles at startup" 5. Select desired setting: System limits – "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door is unlocked. A clear assignment between the remote Pressing again unlocks the entire ve- control and driver may not be possible in hicle. the following cases, for example. – "All doors" – The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own remote control, but an- The entire vehicle is unlocked. other person is driving. – The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com- Tailgate fort Access and has multiple remote Via the Central Information Display (CID): controls with him or her. 1. "My MINI" – The driver changes, but the vehicle is 2. "Vehicle settings" not locked and unlocked. – Multiple remote controls are located 3. "Doors/Key" outside of the vehicle. 4. The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting. 5. Select desired setting: – "Tailgate" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either unlocked or opened.

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 92

CONTROLS Opening and closing

– "Tailgate and door(s)" The vehicle locks automatically after Depending on your vehicle's optional a short period of time if no door is features, the tailgate is either un- opened after unlocking. locked or opened and the doors un- – "Lock after starting to drive" locked. The vehicle locks automatically after – "Tailgate opens after unlocking" you drive off. The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the re- Automatic unlocking mote control. Via the Central Information Display (CID): – "Button lock" 1. "My MINI" It is not possible to use the tailgate via the remote control. 2. "Vehicle settings" Depending on the vehicle equipment and 3. "Doors/Key" country version, this setting may not be of- 4. "Unlock at end of trip" fered. After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the Adjusting the last seat and mirror locked vehicle is automatically un- position locked. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Confirmation signals from the 1. "My MINI" vehicle 2. "Driver profiles" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. Select driver profile. 1. "My MINI" The setting can be made for the driver profile marked with this symbol. 2. "Vehicle settings" 4. "Last seat position automatic" 3. "Doors/Key" When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's 4. Deactivate or activate the desired con- seat and exterior mirrors resume their last firmation signals. set positions. – "Flash for lock/unlock" The most recent position is independent of Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, the positions saved via the seat memory. locking by one. – With alarm system: Automatic locking "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" Via the Central Information Display (CID): Unlocking is signaled by one honk of 1. "My MINI" the horn. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select desired setting: – "Lock automatically"

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 93

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Alarm system

General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: – Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. – Movements in the car's interior. Indicator light on the interior mirror. – Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during attempts at stealing a wheel or when Switching on/off towing the vehicle. When you unlock and lock the vehicle, ei- – Disconnected battery voltage. ther with the remote control or with Com- – Improper use of the socket for Onboard fort Access, the alarm system is switched Diagnosis. off and on at the same time. – Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD On- Opening the doors with the alarm board-Diagnosis. Socket for the OBD On- system switched on board Diagnosis, refer to page 293. The alarm system is triggered when a door The alarm system signals these changes vis- is opened if the door was unlocked using ually and acoustically: the integrated key in the door lock. – Acoustic alarm: Switching off the alarm, refer to page 94. Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed. Opening the tailgate with the alarm – Visual alarm: system switched on By flashing the exterior lighting. The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on. Overview After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. – Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 sec- Indicator light in the roof fin. onds. – Briefly press the button on the remote control three times in succession.

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 94

CONTROLS Opening and closing

To switch off the alarm: press any button. – In automatic vehicle washes. – In duplex garages. Signals of the indicator lights – During transport on trains carrying ve- – The indicator light flashes briefly every hicles, at sea or on a trailer. 2 seconds: – With animals in the vehicle. The alarm system is switched on. – When the vehicle is locked after start of – Indicator light flashes for approx. fueling. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo- 2 seconds: tion sensor can be switched off in such sit- Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm uations. sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor- Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and rectly closed access points are secured. interior motion sensor When the still open access points are Press the remote control button closed, interior motion sensor and tilt again within 10 seconds as soon as alarm sensor will be switched on. the vehicle is locked. – The indicator light goes out after un- The indicator light lights up for approx. locking: 2 seconds and then continues to flash. The vehicle has not been tampered with. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion – The indicator light flashes after unlock- sensor are switched off until the vehicle is ing until the engine ignition is switched locked again. on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Switching off the alarm – Unlock the vehicle with the remote con- Tilt alarm sensor trol or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. control, refer to page 79. The alarm system responds in situations – With Comfort Access: If you have the such as attempts to steal a wheel or when remote control with you, unlock the ve- the vehicle is towed. hicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door. Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Power windows

Avoiding unintentional alarms General information General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed ex- The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion cept a gap. sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 95

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Safety information Closing

– Pull the switch to the resistance WARNING point. When operating the windows, body parts The window closes while the switch is and objects can be jammed. There is a risk being held. of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of – Pull the switch beyond the resist- the windows is clear during opening and ance point. closing. The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again Overview stops the motion. Convenient closing via the remote control, refer to page 78. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 83. Jam protection system

General information If the closing force exceeds a specific value as one of the front windows closes, the clos- Power windows. ing action is interrupted. The window opens slightly. Safety switch. Safety information Opening WARNING – Press the switch to the resistance Accessories on the windows such as an- point. tennas can impact jam protection. There is The window opens while the switch is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories being held. in the area of movement of the windows.

– Press the switch beyond the resistance point. Closing without the jam protection system The window opens automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the motion. In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as Convenient opening via the remote control, follows: refer to page 77. 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 96

CONTROLS Opening and closing

The window closes with limited jam pro- sible to close the window or it may not tection. If the closing force exceeds a be possible to operate it at all. specific threshold, closing is inter- In this case: allow the power window rupted. motor to cool down.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance Initializing the system point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is run- The window closes without jam protec- ning. tion. During initialization, the affected window Safety switch closes without jam protection.

General information WARNING The safety switch in the driver's door can be When operating the windows, body parts used to prevent children, for instance from and objects can be jammed. There is a risk opening and closing the rear windows using of injury or risk of damage to property. the switches in the rear. Make sure that the area of movement of If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows is clear during opening and the safety function is switched off automati- closing. cally. 1. Open the affected window completely. Switching on/off 2. Pull the switch to the resistance Press button. point and hold. The LED lights up if the safety func- The window closes. tion is switched on. 3. Continue holding the switch pulled Malfunction to the resistance point. The window opens and closes once or General information twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment. In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent. 4. Release switch. – After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The Panoramic glass sunroof system must be initialized in this case. – The power window motors are equipped General information with overheating protection. If a win- In the event of a severe accident, the glass dow is opened and closed several times sunroof is automatically closed. within a short period of time, the overheating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be pos-

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 97

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Safety information With the glass sunroof completely raised WARNING – Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. The glass sunroof is Make sure that the area of movement of opened as long as the the glass sunroof is clear during opening switch is pressed. and closing. – Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is opened. Overview Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass Tilting the glass sunroof sunroof fully. Press back the switch up to or Closing glass sunroof beyond the resistance point and release it. With the glass sunroof open The glass sunroof is raised. – Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed Opening glass sunroof as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the When the glass sunroof is closed raised position. Press the switch back beyond – Press the switch forward beyond the re- the resistance point and resistance point and release it. lease it twice. The glass sunroof is closed and stops in The glass sunroof is opened. the raised position. Pressing the switch again Pressing the switch again stops the mo- stops the motion. tion. – Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice. The glass sunroof is closed.

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 98

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- Initializing after a power tion. interruption With the glass sunroof completely After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only raised be operated to a limited extent. The system Press the switch forward be- must be initialized in this case. MINI rec- yond the resistance point and ommends having this work performed only release it. by a dealer's service center or another quali- The glass sunroof is closed. fied service center or repair shop.

Jam protection system

General information If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is interrupted. The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. 2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 99

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options WARNING This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the specific and optional features offered with rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no the series. It also describes features that are longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid- not necessarily available in your vehicle, ing under the safety belt in an accident. e. g., due to the selected options or country There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. versions. This also applies to safety-related Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. functions and systems. When using these Adjust the backrest so that it is in the functions and systems, the applicable laws most upright position as possible and do and regulations must be observed. not adjust again while driving.

Sitting safely WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving An ideal seating position that meets the the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk needs of the occupants can make a vital of damage to property. Make sure that the contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment. In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters: Manually adjustable seats – Seats, refer to page 99. – Safety belts, refer to page 103. Overview – Head restraints, refer to page 105. – Airbags, refer to page 167.

Front seats

Safety information

WARNING 1 Forward/backward Seat adjustments while driving can lead to 2 Thigh support unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi- 3 Height cle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Only adjust the seat on the 4 Backrest tilt driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 100

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Forward/backward Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages properly. Turn the wheel in order to increase or de- crease the curvature. Height Electrically adjustable seats

General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 92, is activated for this purpose. Pull the lever up or press it down as often as The current seat position can be stored us- needed to reach the desired height. ing the memory function, refer to page 107. Overview Backrest tilt

1 Memory function Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. 2 Lumbar support

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 101

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

3 Backrest tilt Backrest tilt 4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Forward/backward

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support Push switch forward or backward. Concept The curvature of the seat backrest can be Height adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Settings – Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/decreased. – Press the upper/lower sec- Push switch up or down. tion of the button: The curvature is shifted Seat tilt up/down.

Move switch up or down.

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 102

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Thigh support Switching off Press and hold the button, until the LEDs go out.

Rear seats

Safety information

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad- WARNING just the thigh support. There is a risk of jamming when folding down the center armrest in the rear. There Front seat heating is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the center armrest is clear Overview during folding down.

WARNING Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any objects to the straps for unlocking the rear backrests.

Seat heating Backrest tilt

Switching on Press button once for each temperature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last. Pull the strap and apply your weight to the When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to backrest or lift it off, as necessary. page 247, the heater output is reduced. After the adjustment, move the backrest slightly forward or back to engage it correctly.

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 103

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Safety belts WARNING Number of safety belts and safety The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when belt buckles safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ensure occupant safety. However, they can additional injuries, for instance in the only offer protection when adjusted cor- event of an accident or during braking and rectly. evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju- The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear ries or danger to life. Make sure that all seat are intended for the persons sitting on occupants are wearing safety belts cor- the left and right. rectly. The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle. WARNING The efficacy of safety gear, including General information safety belts, may not be fully functional or Always make sure that safety belts are be- fail in the following situations: ing worn by all occupants before driving off. – The safety belts or safety belt buckles Although airbags enhance safety by provid- are damaged, soiled, or changed in ing added protection, they are not a substi- any other way. tute for safety belts. – Belt tensioners or belt retractors If needed, disengage the safety belt in the were modified. rear from the belt buckle on the side. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point in the event of an accident. There is a risk will be correct for adult seat occupants of of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify every build if the seat is correctly adjusted. safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and Safety information keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer’s service center or another qualified service WARNING center or repair shop. Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective Correct use of safety belts function. There is a risk of injuries or dan- – Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight ger to life. Do not allow more than one per- to your body over your lap and should- son to wear a single safety belt. Infants ers. and children are not allowed on an occu- – Wear the safety belt deep on your hips pant's lap, but must be transported and se- over your lap. The safety belt may not cured in designated child restraint sys- press on your stomach. tems.

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 104

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp Middle safety belt in the rear edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects. Buckling the safety belt – Avoid thick clothing. – Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body. Buckling the safety belt 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder when fastening it. 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly. 1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in the roof. 2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 1. 3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 2. Safety belt buckles must audibly click into place.

Unbuckling the safety belt Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll- up mechanism.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the roofliner.

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 105

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the Display in the instrument cluster protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the – Do not use seat or head restraint cov- safety belts are positioned correctly. ers. The safety belt reminder can also be acti- – Do not hang objects, for instance vated if objects are placed on the front pas- clothes hangers, directly on the head senger seat. restraint. – Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment Front head restraints to a head restraint. – Do not use any accessories, for in- Safety information stance pillows, while driving. Adjusting the height: John Cooper WARNING Works sport seat A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head re- The height of the head restraints cannot be straints can cause injuries in the head and adjusted. neck area. There is a risk of injury. – Before driving, install the removed Adjusting the height head restraints on the occupied seats. – Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. – Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and WARNING push the head restraint down. Body parts can be jammed when moving – To raise: push the head restraint up. the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. After setting the height, move the head re- Make sure that the area of movement is straint up or down slightly, making sure it clear when moving the head restraint. engages properly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 106

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one WARNING will be sitting in the seat in question. Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. 1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest – Do not use seat or head restraint cov- forward. ers. 2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. – Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the restraint. head restraint out completely. – Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment Installing to a head restraint. Proceed in the reverse order to install the – Do not use any accessories, for in- head restraint. stance pillows, while driving.

Rear head restraints Adjusting the height

Safety information

WARNING A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. – Before driving, install the removed – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and head restraints on the occupied seats. push the head restraint down. – Adjust the head restraint so its center – To raise: push the head restraint up. supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. After setting the height, move the head restraint up or down slightly, making sure it – Adjust the distance so that the head engages properly. restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 107

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Fold down Safety information

WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, WARNING and press down the head restraint, ar- Using the memory function while driving row 2. can lead to unexpected movements of the – Forward: fold the head restraint toward seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is the front as far as it will go. Make sure a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the that the head restraint engages cor- memory function when the vehicle is sta- rectly. tionary.

Removing Overview The head restraints cannot be removed.

Memory function

Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function: – Seat position. – Exterior mirror position. Storing – Height of the Head-up Display. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. General information 3. Press button. The LED in the Different settings can be assigned to two button lights up. memory locations. 4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the The adjustment of the lumbar support is not LED is lit. The LED goes out. stored. Calling up settings The stored position is called up automatically.

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 108

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Press selected button 1 or 2. Safety information The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat or one of the memory buttons WARNING is pressed. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer While driving, the seat position adjustment than they appear. The distance to the traf- on the driver's side is interrupted after a fic behind could be incorrectly estimated, short time. for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of an accident. Estimate the distance Calling up of a seat position to the traffic behind by looking over your deactivated shoulder. After a brief period, calling up stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. Overview To reactivate calling up of a seat position: – Open or close the door or tailgate. – Press a button on the remote control. – Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors 1 Settings 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- General information itor The mirror on the front passenger side is 3 Folding in and out more curved than the driver's side mirror. The mirror setting is stored for the driver Selecting a mirror profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the posi- To change over to the other mirror: tion is automatically retrieved if the func- Slide the switch. tion, refer to page 92, is activated for this purpose. Adjusting electrically The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to Press button. page 107. The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 109

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

Folding in and out Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's NOTICE side mirror position. Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi- 2. Engage selector lever position R. cle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Be- fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand Deactivating or with the button. Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position. Press button. Interior mirror, manually dimmable Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. Flip lever Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations: – In vehicle washes. – On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically To reduce the blinding effect of the interior heated whenever the ignition is switched mirror, flip the lever forward. on. Turn knob Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 110, are used to control this. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass by the interior mirror. on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 110

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Interior mirror, automatic dimming Settings feature

Overview

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating Photocells are used for control: position. – In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up. – On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements – Keep the photocells clean. – Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

WARNING Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 111

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Safety information designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child WARNING restraint system can no longer be used due Unattended children or animals can cause to their age, weight, and size. the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the Safety information following actions: – Pressing the Start/Stop button. WARNING – Releasing the parking brake. The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- – Opening and closing the doors or rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, windows. 150 cm without suitable additional child – Engaging selector lever position N. restraint systems. The efficacy of safety – Using vehicle equipment. gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened in- There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety not leave children or animals unattended belt can cause additional injuries, for in- in the vehicle. Take the remote control stance in the event of an accident or dur- with you when exiting and lock the vehi- ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There cle. is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se- cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems. Always transport children in the rear seat Children on the front passenger General information seat Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. General information Transport children younger than 13 years of Before using a child restraint system on the age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, rear seat in suitable child restraint systems knee, and side airbags on the front passen-

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 112

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

ger side are deactivated. Automatic deacti- Safety information vation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 169. WARNING Safety information The protective effect of damaged child restraint systems or of child restraint systems exposed to an accident and their fas- WARNING tening systems can be limited or lost. A Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- child can e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, jure a child in a child restraint system for instance in the event of an accident or when the airbags are activated. There is a braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- risk of injuries or danger to life. Have dam- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and aged child restraint systems or of child re- that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- straint systems exposed to an accident and tor light lights up. their fastening systems checked and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re- WARNING pair shop. The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of WARNING the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or The stability of the child restraint system danger to life. Make sure that the child re- is limited or compromised with incorrect straint system fits securely against the seat adjustment or improper installation of backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or tilt for all affected backrests and correctly danger to life. Make sure that the child readjust the seats. Make sure that seats and straint system fits securely against the backrests are securely engaged or locked. backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest If possible, adjust the height of the head tilt for all affected backrests and correctly restraints or remove them. adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them. Installing child restraint systems On the front passenger seat

General information Deactivating airbags Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child re- WARNING straint systems. Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 113

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- Locking the safety belt tor light lights up. 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. After installing a child restraint system in 2. Secure the child restraint system with the front passenger seat, make sure that the the safety belt. front, knee and side airbags on the front 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and passenger side are deactivated. pull it tight against the child restraint Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags system. The safety belt is locked. automatically, refer to page 169. Unlocking the safety belt Seat position and height 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. Before installing a child restraint system, 2. Remove the child restraint system. move the front passenger seat as far back as 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- possible and adjust its height to the highest pletely. and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event In some cases it may be necessary to sepa- of an accident. rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to page 103. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

LATCH child restraint fixing system General information Pay attention to the operating and safety in- LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- formation of the child restraint system man- dren. ufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 114

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Mounts for the lower LATCH Before installing LATCH child anchors restraint fixing systems The lower anchors may be used to attach Pull the safety belt away from the area of the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- the child restraint system. bined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal Assembly of LATCH child restraint harnesses. fixing systems Safety information 1. Install child restraint system, see manufacturer's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are WARNING properly connected. If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protec- Child restraint systems with tether tive effect of the LATCH child restraint strap fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely en- Safety information gaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the WARNING backrest. If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the Position protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not guided across sharp Symbol Meaning edges and without twisting to the upper The corresponding symbol retaining strap. shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower WARNING anchors are marked with a If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro- pair, 2, of LATCH symbols. tective effect of the child restraint system For vehicles equipped with is limited or there is none. In particular a middle seat: situations, for instance braking maneuvers It is not recommended to or in case of an accident, the rear backrest use the inner lower anchors can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries of standard outer LATCH or danger to life. Make sure that the rear positions to fasten a child backrests are locked. restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 115

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

the supports of the head restraint to the NOTICE anchor. The anchors for the upper retaining straps 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to of child restraint systems are only pro- the anchor on the rear seat. vided for these retaining straps. When 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it other objects are mounted, the anchors down. can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper retaining straps. Locking the doors and windows Anchors The respective symbol shows the an- Doors chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press button on the driver's door if 1 Direction of travel children are being transported in 2 Head restraint the rear. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap This locks various functions so that they 4 Anchor cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 96. 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining strap between or along both sides of

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving

Driving

Vehicle features and options – When the engine is switched off automatically using the Auto Start/Stop function. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with Some electronic systems/power consumers the series. It also describes features that are remain ready for operation. not necessarily available in your vehicle, Radio-ready state is switched off automati- e. g., due to the selected options or country cally: versions. This also applies to safety-related – If the driver's or front passenger door is functions and systems. When using these opened when exiting the vehicle, with functions and systems, the applicable laws drive-ready state switched off manually. and regulations must be observed. – If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button. Start/Stop button, drive-ready – After approx. 8 minutes. – When the vehicle is locked using the state central locking system. – Shortly before the battery is discharged Concept completely, so that the engine can still The following ready states can be started. be attained by pressing the If the engine is switched off and the igni- Start/Stop button: tion is switched on, the system automati- – Radio-ready state on/off. cally switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are switched off or, if correspondingly – Ignition on/off. equipped, the daytime running lights are – Activating/deactivating drive-ready switched on. state. To activate drive-ready state, press the Ignition on brake pedal. Press the Start/Stop button, and do not The drive-ready state cannot be activated as press on the brake pedal at the same time. long as the charging cable, refer to All vehicle systems are ready for operation. page 254, is connected. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied Switching radio-ready state on/off length of time. The radio-ready state is activated by press- To save battery power when the engine is ing the Start/Stop button in the following off, switch off the ignition and any unneces- situations: sary electronic systems/power consumers. – When the engine is running. – When drive-ready state is activated. Ignition off Press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster Drive-ready state in detail go out. To save battery power when the engine is Concept off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. The following are the different drive-ready state variants: Safety measures – Electric drive-ready state, refer to The ignition is switched off automatically in page 118. the following situations while the vehicle is The vehicle is powered by the electric stationary and the engine is off: motor. – When locking the vehicle, and when the – Starting the combustion engine, refer to low beams are switched on. page 118. – Shortly before the battery is discharged The vehicle is powered by the combus- completely, so that the engine can still tion engine. be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched Safety information off. – When opening or closing the driver DANGER door, if the driver's safety belt is un- buckled and the low beams are switched If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila- off. tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust – While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- gases contain pollutants which are color- led with driver's door open and low less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- beams off. haust gases can also accumulate outside of – When the front doors are opened if the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep there is no other person sitting in the the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient front seats. ventilation. The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 10 minutes of no use. When the ignition is switched off automati- WARNING cally by opening or closing the driver's door, When driving in electric mode, pedes- unbuckling the driver's safety belt or by the trians and other traffic might pay less at- automatic switching of the low beams to tention to the vehicle due to the lack of parking lights, the radio-ready state remains engine noise. There is a risk of an acci- active. dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in- Drive-ready state tervene where appropriate. When drive-ready state is activated, the vehicle is operational. Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a running engine in conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive- ready state is equivalent to switching the ignition off.

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving

Depending on the prerequisite, the electric WARNING drive-ready state is possible or the engine An unsecured vehicle can begin to move can be started. and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- Electric drive-ready state cle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- General information cured against rolling away, follow the fol- The vehicle is ready for driving without lowing: starting the combustion engine. – Set the parking brake. Functional requirement – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- The electric drive-ready state is possible, if rection of the curb. the prerequisites for electric driving, refer to page 120, are fulfilled. – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Display READY indicates drive-ready state. WARNING Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Combustion engine start – Pressing the Start/Stop button. Functional requirements – Releasing the parking brake. The combustion engine is started with acti- – Opening and closing the doors or vation of the drive-ready state, refer to windows. page 118, under the following conditions: – Engaging selector lever position N. – The temperature of the hybrid system is – Using vehicle equipment. too high or too low. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do – The high-voltage battery has an insuffi- not leave children or animals unattended cient charge. in the vehicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehi- Driving away cle. 1. Activate drive-ready state. 2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or Activating drive-ready state R. 1. Close the driver's door. 3. Release the parking brake. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 4. Drive away. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS

Deactivating drive-ready state power and energy recovery is not active, is After stopping the vehicle: referred to as coasting, refer to page 122. The combustion engine is not switched off 1. Set the parking brake. automatically in the following situations: 2. Engage selector lever position P. – The combustion engine is not at operat- 3. Press the Start/Stop button. ing temperature. After parking the vehicle, you may hear – The transmission selector lever is in po- noises due to operation of the hybrid sys- sition M/S. tem, such as for cooling of the high-voltage – High-voltage battery is heavily dis- battery. charged or vehicle electrical system is heavily burdened. Safety measure – High stress of the automatic climate The drive-ready state is deactivated auto- control in the heating or cooling phase. matically after approx. 10 minutes when the – The hood is unlocked. vehicle is stationary if, with the selector – The vehicle is being optimized for the lever in position P or N, the driver's door current driving style, for instance dur- has been opened and neither the brake ing the break-in period or after a service pedal nor the accelerator pedal have been appointment. depressed. – The hybrid system is malfunctioning. Before driving into a vehicle wash Safety mode So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash, follow instructions for going into an An automatically stopped combustion en- automatic vehicle wash, refer to page 313. gine does not start independently: – When the driver's door is open and neither the brake nor accelerator pedal are Auto Start/Stop function depressed. – When the hood is unlocked. Concept The indicator lights come on. The combus- The Auto Start/Stop function helps save tion engine can only be started via the fuel. The system switches off the combus- Start/Stop button. tion engine when conditions for electric driving have been met. The ignition or Switching off the vehicle during an drive-ready state remains switched on. automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehi- General information cle can be switched off permanently, for in- READY is displayed in the instrument clus- stance when leaving it. ter. If necessary, the combustion engine 1. Press the Start/Stop button. starts automatically. – The ignition is switched off. The combustion engine is also stopped during the trip when rolling without accelera- – The radio-ready state is activated. tion or braking. This driving condition, in which the vehicle is traveling without

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving

– The Auto Start/Stop function is de- – Selector lever position D or R engaged. activated. – The accelerator pedal is only slightly de- – Engage selector lever position P. pressed. 2. Set the parking brake. – The possible maximum speed for electric driving is not exceeded. Malfunction – The driver's door is closed. The Auto Start/Stop function no longer – MID or GREEN driving mode is selected. switches off the combustion engine automatically in the event of a malfunction. A eDRIVE button message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked. General information Using the eDRIVE button, the characteris- Electric driving: ePOWER. tics of the hybrid system can be adjusted. – MAX eDrive, refer to page 121 General information – Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 120 – SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 121 In ePOWER, the vehicle is driven exclusively electrically. ePOWER works automat- To switch between the individual function ically. modes, press the eDRIVE button up or down. Depending on the charge state of the high- voltage battery, maximum speed and range Overview achieved can vary. For electrical driving, certain conditions, refer to page 120, must be satisfied. Displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 139. Safety information

WARNING When driving in electric mode, pedes- eDRIVE button trians and other traffic might pay less attention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of an acci- Auto eDRIVE dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in- General information tervene where appropriate. Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the vehicle is started via the Start/Stop but- Functional requirements ton. – State of charge and temperature of the In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hy- high-voltage battery is sufficient. brid mode corresponding to the various

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS

driving situations, i.e. the drive combines Using the button: combustion engine and electric motor. The respectively most effective drive type is 1. Activate with the MAX eDRIVE preferred. button. 2. "Configure MAX eDRIVE" MAX eDRIVE 3. "MAX eDRIVE by default" General information The function is available, if the prerequisites for electric driving are fulfilled, refer The vehicle is driven exclu- to page 120. sively electrically. SAVE BATTERY

General information If necessary, the maximum electrical speed that applies to MAX eDRIVE may be delib- The current charge state of erately exceeded with the aid of kickdown, the high-voltage battery can refer to page 135. The combustion engine be maintained or increased is automatically started and the system with SAVE BATTERY. The switches to AUTO eDRIVE mode. Auto- electric range can be con- matic starting of the engine while driving, served in this way for a later refer to page 122. point in the trip, for instance. This charging process increases the average Activating MAX eDRIVE fuel consumption. Press the button up repeatedly, un- The acceleration boost by the electric motor til MAX eDRIVE is displayed in the may be restricted. instrument cluster. The function is only available if sufficient When pressing the button, the current fuel is available and in selector lever posi- eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on tion D. the Control Display. Activating SAVE BATTERY Specifying eMAX eDRIVE as the Press the button down repeatedly, default mode until SAVE with the battery symbol MAX eDRIVE can be specified as the de- is displayed in the instrument clus- fault mode instead of AUTO eDRIVE. ter. Via the Central Information Display (CID): When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on 1. "My MINI" the Control Display. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Configure MAX eDRIVE" 4. "MAX eDRIVE by default"

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving

Auto Start/Stop function, coasting Driving with the combustion engine: POWER Concept The combustion engine is automatically stopped and disengaged from the drivetrain. Concept This driving condition of rolling is referred The combustion engine provides the main to as coasting. drive power to move the vehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery is charged at Functional requirements the same time. Coasting is possible: Functional requirements – The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged. Automatic starting while driving – Transmission position D is engaged. The combustion engine is automatically – The drive system is at operating temper- started under the following conditions while ature. driving: – GREEN Mode: when coasting, without – During intense accelerations or on up- operating the brake, at speeds below hill grades. 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h. – By pressing the accelerator pedal be- After coasting, the combustion or electric yond the resistance point at the full motor restarts depending on the operating throttle position, kickdown. state. – The high-voltage battery has an insufficient charge. Acoustic pedestrian protection – Selector lever position M/S is engaged. Concept – The speed for electric driving is exceeded while accelerating. Depending on the country-specific version, the system generates a continuous driving – Adapting to the course of the road when noise at standstill with the drive-ready state destination guidance is activated. activated and during electric driving up to – System-related requirement for hybrid approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. components. A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the surroundings. Automatic switching off while driving As a result, other traffic participants, for in- When reducing speed, the combustion en- stance pedestrians or cyclists, can better gine is switched off when the conditions for perceive the vehicle. electric driving, refer to page 120, are met.

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 123

Driving CONTROLS

Assistance from the electric – The vehicle is moving. motor – Selector lever position D, M/S is set. – The high-voltage battery is not fully Concept charged. The combustion engine provides the main Displays in the instrument cluster drive power to move the vehicle. Energy recovery displays in the instrument The electric motor provides assistance as cluster, refer to page 140. needed with additional propulsive power.

eASSIST Parking brake During normal vehicle operation, the electric motor assists the combustion engine, depending on the situation. This assistance Concept reduces fuel consumption. The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. eBOOST Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, Safety information requires the maximum available power from the electric motor. To do this, apply extra WARNING force to the accelerator pedal. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- Energy recovery: CHARGE cle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- Concept cured against rolling away, follow the fol- The hybrid system makes it possible to con- lowing: vert kinetic energy into electrical energy – Set the parking brake. during braking and coasting. This recovered – On uphill grades or on a downhill energy charges the high-voltage battery. If slope, turn the front wheels in the di- necessary, this stored electrical energy is rection of the curb. output to the electric motor. – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- General information stance with a wheel chock. Depending on the setting of the MINI Driv- ing Modes switch, the high-voltage battery is charged at different speeds and the vehi- WARNING cle is decelerated differently while coasting. Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger them- Functional requirements selves and traffic, for instance due to the Conditions such as the following must be following actions: met to recover kinetic energy: – Pressing the Start/Stop button.

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 124

CONTROLS Driving

– Releasing the parking brake. While driving – Opening and closing the doors or To use as emergency brake while driving: windows. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle – Engaging selector lever position N. brakes hard while the switch is being – Using vehicle equipment. pulled. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do The indicator light lights up red, a not leave children or animals unattended signal sounds and the brake lights in the vehicle. Take the remote control light up. with you when exiting and lock the vehi- A Check Control message is displayed. cle. If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged. Overview Releasing

Releasing manually 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator light go out. Parking brake The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with Setting Steptronic transmission For automatic release, step on the accelera- With a stationary vehicle tor pedal. Pull the switch. The LED and indicator light go out. The LED lights up. The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the The indicator light lights up red. The following conditions: parking brake is set. – Engine on. – Drive mode engaged. Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically. – Driver buckled in and doors closed. Steptronic transmission: in some parking situations, the parking brake is automati- Malfunction cally engaged, when selector lever posi- In the event of a failure or malfunction of tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park- the parking brake, secure the vehicle ing brake is released automatically when against rolling using a wheel chock, for in- you leave the selector lever position P. stance when leaving it.

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 125

Driving CONTROLS

After a power failure The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. Putting the parking brake into Via the Central Information Display (CID): operation 1. "My MINI" 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "Vehicle settings" 2. Press the switch while stepping on 3. "Lighting" the brake pedal or selector lever posi- 4. "Exterior lighting" tion P is set. 5. "One-touch turn signal" It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associ- 6. Select the desired setting. ated with this are normal. Settings are stored for the profile currently The indicator light in the instrument used. cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the Turn signal, high beams, head- turn signal to flash. light flasher Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator Turn signal light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Using turn signals High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Press the lever past the resistance point. Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off man- – High beams on, arrow 1. ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance The high beams light up when the low point. beams are switched on. – High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- Triple turn signal activation row 2. Lightly tap the lever up or down.

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 126

CONTROLS Driving

Washer/wiper system – Resting position of the wipers, position 0. General information – Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is – Normal wiper speed, position 2. dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly. – Fast wiper speed, position 3. When travel is interrupted with the wiper Safety information system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed. WARNING Switching off and brief wipe If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE Press the lever down. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, – Switching off: press the lever down until the wiper blades can be torn off and the it reaches its standard position. wiper motor can overheat when switching – Brief wipe: press the lever down from on. There is a risk of damage to property. the standard position. Defrost the windshield prior to switching The lever automatically returns to its in- the wipers on. itial position when released.

Switching on Interval mode or rain sensor Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the Press the lever up until the desired position wiper operation is preset. is reached.

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 127

Driving CONTROLS

Safety information Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating Turn the thumbwheel. With deactivated rain sensor: set interval. With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor. Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. Windshield washer system Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. Safety information If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated. WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- Deactivating dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only Press the lever back into the standard posi- use the washer systems, if the washer tion. fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 128

CONTROLS Driving

Cleaning the windshield – In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its resting position when released. – In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its intermittent position when released. Fold-away position of the wipers

Pull the lever. Concept The system sprays washer fluid on the The fold-out position enables the wipers to windshield and activates the wipers briefly. be folded away from the windshield.

Windshield washer nozzles General information The washer jets are automatically heated Helpful when changing the wiper blades or whenever the ignition is switched on. under frosty conditions, for instance.

Rear window wiper Safety information

Overview WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

Switching on the rear window wiper NOTICE Turn the outer switch upward. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, – Resting position of the wiper, posi- the wiper blades can be torn off and the tion 0. wiper motor can overheat when switching – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- on. There is a risk of damage to property. verse gear is engaged, the system Defrost the windshield prior to switching switches to continuous operation. the wipers on.

Clean the rear window Folding away the wipers Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. tion.

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 129

Driving CONTROLS

2. Press and hold the wiper level down, un- Safety information til the wipers stop in a close to vertical position. WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield. NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- again for operation. ance point. – Normal wiper speed: tap up once. – Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap Canada: wiper system once beyond the resistance point. The lever automatically returns to its initial General information position when released. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 130

CONTROLS Driving

Switching off and brief wipe Activating/deactivating

Press the lever down. Press the button on the wiper lever. – To switch off from fast wiper speed: Wiping is started. press down twice. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. – To switch off from normal wiper speed: If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper op- press down once. eration is deactivated. – Brief wipe: press down once. During trip interruption with the rain sen- The lever automatically returns to its initial sor switched on: if the trip is resumed position when released. within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again. Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Concept the rain sensor The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information Turn the thumbwheel. With deactivated rain sensor: set interval. With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- NOTICE sor sensitivity. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the can accidentally start moving in vehicle rain sensor. washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the washes. rain sensor.

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 131

Driving CONTROLS

Windshield washer system Rear window wiper

Safety information Overview

WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE Switching on the rear window wiper When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, Turn the outer switch upward. the wash pump cannot work as intended. – Resting position of the wiper, posi- There is a risk of damage to property. Do tion 0. not use the washer system when the – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- washer fluid reservoir is empty. verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Cleaning the windshield Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. – In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its resting position when released. – In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its intermittent position Pull the lever. when released. The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Fold-away position of the wipers

Windshield washer nozzles Concept The washer jets are automatically heated The fold-out position enables the wipers to whenever the ignition is switched on. be folded away from the windshield. General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 132

CONTROLS Driving

Safety information 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield. WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on. Folding down the wipers NOTICE After the wipers are folded back down, the If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, wiper system must be reactivated. the wiper blades can be torn off and the 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wiper motor can overheat when switching windshield. on. There is a risk of damage to property. 2. Switch on the ignition. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation. Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the Washer fluid point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain General information in a nearly vertical position All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 133

Driving CONTROLS

Safety information NOTICE WARNING Mixing different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze can damage the Some antifreeze agents can contain harm- washing system. There is a risk of damage ful substances and are flammable. There is to property. Do not mix different wind- a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow shield washer concentrates or antifreeze. the instructions on the containers. Keep Follow the information and mixing ratios antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do provided on the containers. not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. Overview United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allow- able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con- centrate or the equivalent is recommended. The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. WARNING Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on Malfunction contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- The use of undiluted windshield washer erty. Only add washer fluid when the en- concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lead to incorrect readings at temperatures lid of the washer fluid reservoir. below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

NOTICE Steptronic transmission Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the Concept windows can lead to damage to the wash- The Steptronic transmission combines the ing system. There is a risk of damage to functions of an automatic transmission with property. Do not add silicon-containing ad- the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. ditives to the washer fluid.

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 134

CONTROLS Driving

Safety information The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions. WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Selector lever positions and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- Drive mode D cle against rolling. Selector lever position for normal vehicle In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- operation. All gears for forward travel are cured against rolling away, follow the fol- activated automatically. lowing: – Set the parking brake. Reverse R – On uphill grades or on a downhill Engage selector lever position R only when slope, turn the front wheels in the di- the vehicle is stationary. rection of the curb. Neutral N – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- The vehicle may be pushed or roll without stance with a wheel chock. engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 135. Selector lever version Parking position P General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, a General information transmission with either a latching selector Selector lever position, for instance for lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in- parking the vehicle. stalled. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P. Transmission with a latching selector Engage selector lever position P only when lever the vehicle is stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move. Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever

General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D you select a drive mode, maintain pressure are selected by moving the selector lever on the brake pedal until you are ready to into the respective selector lever position. start.

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 135

Driving CONTROLS

Functional requirements Rolling or pushing the vehicle The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on General information or the engine is running. In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, Engaging selector lever position D, N, for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed. R, or P With the vehicle stationary, depress the Engaging selector lever position N: brake pedal before shifting out of selector with a latching selector lever lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift 1. Switch on drive-ready state. block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. A selector lever lock prevents the following 3. Depress the brake pedal. faulty operation: 4. Touch the selector lever lock and en- – Unintentional shifting into selector gage selector lever position N. lever position P or R. 5. Release brake. – Unintentional shifting from selector The vehicle may roll. lever position P into another selector If there is a malfunction, you may not be lever position. able to change the selector lever position. 1. To release the selector lever lock: with Manually unlock the transmission lock, if the brake pedal depressed, press the needed, refer to page 137. button on the front of the selector lever. Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. Sport program M/S

Concept 2. Move the selector lever into the desired The shifting points and shifting times in the position. Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 136

CONTROLS Driving

Activating the sport program Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D, arrow 1.

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it ment cluster, for instance S1. backward, arrows 2. The sport program of the transmission is ac- Manual mode M/S becomes active and the tivated. gear is changed. eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a ment cluster, for instance M1. standstill and braking phases are used more often to recover energy. Depending on the Shifting driving situation, the high-voltage battery is – To shift down: press the selector lever charged at different speeds. Fuel consump- forward. tion can increase. – To shift up: pull the selector lever rear- wards. Ending the Sport program The Steptronic transmission continues Push the selector lever to the right. shifting automatically in certain situations, D is displayed in the instrument cluster. for instance when certain engine speed limits are reached. Manual mode M/S Ending the manual mode Concept Push the selector lever to the right. Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual D is displayed in the instrument cluster. mode. Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 137

Driving CONTROLS

Releasing the transmission lock 4. Press the button on the front of the se- manually: with a latching selector lector lever and move the selector lever lever back slightly. Release the release lever. If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being 5. Bring the selector lever into the desired switched on, the brake pedal being de- position. pressed and the button on the selector lever For additional information, see the chapter being pressed, the transmission lock can be on tow-starting and towing. unlocked manually: Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. 1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together with the lower retaining ring, from the center console. To do so, pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if needed. 3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 294, press the yellow release lever downward, see arrow.

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 138

CONTROLS Displays

Displays

Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Displays of the hybrid system 139 4 Fuel gauge 146 2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 146 3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 139

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 139

Displays CONTROLS

Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems Onboard Computer 151 Messages, for instance Check Control Charging screen 139 Time 147 2 Selector lever position 133 External temperature 146 3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta- Selection lists 151 tus 189 Total miles/trip odometer 146 eDRIVE mode status 120

Charging screen Departure time with timer 259 4 Stationary climate control 259

Displays of the hybrid system

Displays in the instrument cluster

General information The following functions of the hybrid sys- 1 Charging status 259 tem are displayed: 2 Timer, departure time 259 – High-voltage battery charge indicator, 3 End of charging time 259 refer to page 140.

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays

– Drive-ready state: READY, refer to A pointer indicates the power outputted by page 140. the hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2. – Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to If the pointer is outside the range high- page 140. lighted in yellow, the combustion engine is – Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to switched on, arrow 3. page 140. For further information, refer to Electric – Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to driving: ePOWER. page 140. – Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to Energy recovery: CHARGE page 141. – SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 141. The display depends on the system's operating condition.

High-voltage battery charge indicator The Onboard Computer in the instrument cluster can indicate the charge state of the high-voltage battery. Energy recovery during coasting and brak- Drive-ready state: READY ing is indicated as CHARGE in the instrument cluster depending on the driving READY indicates drive-ready mode, see arrow. The high-voltage battery is state. For further information, charged. If the high-voltage battery is com- see Drive-ready state in detail, pletely charged, no energy can be recov- refer to page 117. ered. For further information, please refer to En- Electric driving: ePOWER. ergy recovery CHARGE, refer to page 123.

Acceleration boost: eBOOST

In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driving is colored yellow, arrow 1. The range highlighted in yellow can vary de- If the electric motor supports the combus- pending on the driving situation and tion engine, for instance during rapid accel- eDRIVE mode. eration, eBOOST, refer to page 123, is displayed. Depending on the available charge

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS

state of the high-voltage battery, there – System requirements of the hybrid sys- could be more or less eBOOST available. If tem, for instance drive system not yet the charge state of the high-voltage battery warmed up to operating temperature. is low, eBOOST may not be available. – Driving requirement, for instance transmission selector lever in the M/S posi- Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE tion. The display becomes active af- Displaying the energy flow ter MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 121, is activated via the Via the Central Information Display (CID): eDRIVE button. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" SAVE BATTERY 3. "eDRIVE" The display becomes active af- Adapting to the course of the road ter SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 121, is activated via the Concept eDRIVE button. When the navigation system destination guidance is active, hybrid operation adapts The high-voltage energy available for elec- to specific route sections. tric driving is conserved for a later point in Use of the hybrid system is optional. the trip. Situations which are already underway and Indications on the Control Display situations ahead are detected, indicated on the Control Display, and the hybrid drive is Current vehicle state adapted and prepared for them. The function may be restricted if the navi- General information gation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example. The following are displayed: – Active components of the hybrid sys- Functional requirements tem: – Selector lever position D engaged. Orange: energy flow of the combustion – AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated. engine. Yellow: energy flow of the hybrid sys- Displaying the adaptation to the course of tem. the road – Vehicle states: Via the Central Information Display (CID): – ePOWER. 1. "My MINI" – POWER. 2. "Technology in action" – eBOOST. 3. "eDRIVE" – CHARGE. The symbol on the Control Display – Coasting. indicates that the function is active. – Charging.

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays

Display Indicator/warning lights

General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Example: residential area or area with low Red lights speed limits. ePOWER electric driving is being prepared. When the residential area Safety belt reminder is reached, electric driving takes prece- Indicator light flashes or is illumi- dence. nated: safety belt on the driver or Other situations are also shown on the Con- passenger side is not buckled. The trol Display: safety belt reminder can also be activated if – Downhill gradients: the system is ready objects are placed on the front passenger to charge the high-voltage battery. seat. – Target zone: ePOWER electric driving is Make sure that the safety belts are posi- being prepared. tioned correctly. – GREEN Mode: Energy distribution: the electrical en- Airbag system ergy is conserved for a later point. Airbag system and belt tensioner are not working. Have the vehicle checked immedi- Check Control ately by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Concept The Check Control system monitors func- Parking brake tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal- The parking brake is set. functions in the monitored systems. Release the parking brake, refer to General information page 124. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights Brake system and SMS text messages in the instrument Braking system impaired. Continue cluster and in the Head-up Display. to drive moderately. In addition, an acoustic signal may be out- Have the vehicle checked immedi- put and a SMS text message may appear on ately by a dealer’s service center or the Control Display. another qualified service center or repair shop.

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS

Approach control warning Yellow lights Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when Anti-lock Braking System ABS there is the impending danger of a Braking force boost may not be collision or the distance to the vehicle working. Avoid abrupt braking. Take ahead is too small. the longer braking distance into ac- Increase distance. count. Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the Have the system immediately imminent danger of a collision when the ve- checked by a dealer’s service center hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- or another qualified service center or repair tively high differential speed. shop. Intervention by braking or make an evasive maneuver. DSC Dynamic Stability Control The indicator light flashes: DSC con- Person warning trols the drive and braking forces. If a collision with a person detected The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce in this way is imminent, the symbol speed and modify your driving style to the lights up and a signal sounds. driving circumstances. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned. Orange lights Have the system checked by a dealer’s serv- Active Cruise Control ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. The number bars shows the selected DSC, refer to page 187. distance from the vehicle driving ahead. Camera-based cruise control, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control is page 191. deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle DSC, refer to page 187, and DTC, re- has been detected ahead of you. fer to page 188. Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work. Flat Tire Monitor FTM The system was deactivated but applies the The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss brakes until you actively resume control by of tire inflation pressure in a tire. pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator Reduce your speed and stop cau- pedal. tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 176.

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 144

CONTROLS Displays

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Reduce the vehicle speed and have the The indicator light lights up: the Tire system checked immediately; otherwise, Pressure Monitor reports a low tire serious engine misfiring within a brief inflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol- period can seriously damage emission low the information in the Check Control control components, in particular the message. catalytic converter. The indicator light flashes and then contin- Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to uously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire page 293. inflation pressure can be detected. – Interference caused by systems or devi- Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive ces with the same radio frequency: after Acoustic pedestrian protection deac- leaving the area of the interference, the tivated or possibly not working. system automatically becomes active Have the system checked by a deal- again. er’s service center or another qualified serv- – TPM was unable to complete the reset. ice center or repair shop. Reset the system again. – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics Green lights is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified Turn signal service center or repair shop as needed. – Malfunction: have the system checked Turn signal switched on. by a dealer’s service center or another Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- qualified service center or repair shop. cator light indicates that a turn sig- Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 171. nal bulb has failed. Turn signal, refer to page 125. Steering system Parking lights, headlight Steering system in some cases not working. Parking lights or headlights are Have the system checked by a deal- switched on. er’s service center or another qualified serv- Parking lights/low beams, headlight ice center or repair shop. control, refer to page 161.

Emissions Front fog lights – The warning light lights up: Front fog lights are switched on. Emissions are deteriorating. Front fog lights, refer to page 164. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. High-beam Assistant – The warning light flashes under certain circumstances: High-beam Assistant is switched on. This indicates that there is excessive High beams are switched on and off misfiring in the engine. automatically depending on the traffic situation.

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 145

Displays CONTROLS

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 163. Displaying stored Check Control messages Cruise control Via the Central Information Display (CID): The system is switched on. It main- 1. "My MINI" tains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering 2. "Vehicle status" wheel. 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the SMS text message. Blue lights Display High beams High beams are switched on. Check Control High beams, refer to page 125. At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored. Hiding Check Control messages SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can Press and hold button on signal lever. be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will Continuous display be automatically displayed on the Control Display. Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the Further help malfunction is eliminated. If several mal- Depending on the Check Control message, functions occur at once, the messages are further help can be selected. displayed consecutively. Via the Central Information Display (CID): The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis- 1. "My MINI" played again automatically. 2. "Vehicle status" Temporary display 3. "Check Control" Some Check Control messages are hidden 4. Select the desired text message. automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The 5. Select the desired setting. Check Control messages are stored and can – "Owner's Manual" be displayed again later.

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 146

CONTROLS Displays

Display additional information about Reset the trip odometer the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. Press the button. – "Service request" – The odometer is displayed when the ignition is Contact a dealer’s service center or switched off. another qualified service center or repair shop. – When the ignition is switched on, the trip od- – "MINI Roadside Assistance" ometer is reset. Contact Roadside Assistance.

Messages after trip completion External temperature Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off. General information If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds. Fuel gauge A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which Safety information side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Vehicle tilt position may cause WARNING the display to vary. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ Information on refueling, refer to page 262. there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of The yellow indicator light illumi- road. There is a risk of an accident. Modify nates, once the fuel reserve is your driving style to the weather condi- reached. tions at low temperatures.

Display Odometer and trip odometer The external temperature is displayed in the instrument Concept cluster. The total number of kilometers driven and the number of kilometers driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 147

Displays CONTROLS

Time – Automatic climate control settings. – Driving style. The time is displayed in the – Traffic conditions. instrument cluster. – Program changes via the MINI Driving The time can be set via the Modes switch. Central Information Display – Climate and terrain conditions. (CID). With a low remaining range: – A Check Control message is displayed briefly. Date – The remaining range is shown on the Onboard Computer. The date is displayed in the in- – With a dynamic driving style, for instrument cluster. stance taking curves aggressively, the The date can be set via the engine function is not always ensured. Central Information Display The Check Control message is continuously (CID). displayed below a certain range. As soon as a respectively low fuel tank filling level is reached, MAX eDRIVE is auto- Range matically selected to protect the combustion engine if the requirements for electric driving are met. The Steptronic Sport program is Concept not available. The range indicates the distance that can You may continue driving with reduced per- still be covered with the current fuel level formance and exclusively with electric mo- and the electric energy of the high-voltage tor power. battery. Follow further information on refueling. General information Safety information The range can be displayed as range for electric driving or as total range. The total range considers the capacity of the fuel NOTICE tank as well as the electric energy in the With a driving range of less than high-voltage battery. If the requirements for 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer electric driving are not met, the total range have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are considers the content of the fuel tank only. not ensured anymore. There is a risk of Various factors, such as the automatic cli- damage to property. Refuel promptly. mate control settings, are taken into account when calculating the electric range. The electric range value is adapted dynami- cally. The following factors are taken into account when calculating the range:

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 148

CONTROLS Displays

Current consumption NOTICE If the range is too small, the normal drive Concept power is not available. Engine functions are not ensured. There is a risk of damage The current fuel consumption of the com- to property. Refuel as soon as possible. bustion engine and of the electric motor can be displayed.

Display, electric range Display, electric motor In MAX eDRIVE mode, the The current electric consumption is dis- electric range can be displayed on the Onboard Computer. played via the Onboard Com- The current electric energy puter in the instrument clus- consumption or generation ter. can be monitored. The display indicates that the Consumed energy: + sign high-voltage battery is almost Generated energy: - sign fully discharged or the electric drive is currently not availa- Displaying the current fuel ble. consumption Via the Central Information Display (CID): Display total range 1. "My MINI" The current total range is displayed in the instrument clus- 2. "System settings" ter. 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Current consumption" Displaying the cruising range Via the Central Information Display (CID): Service requirements 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" Concept 3. "Displays" The function displays the service require- 4. "Instrument panel" ments and the corresponding maintenance scopes. 5. "Range" General information After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 149

Displays CONTROLS

A service advisor can read out the current Via the Central Information Display (CID): service requirements from your remote control. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" Display 3. "Service required" 4. "Vehicle inspection" Detailed information on service requirements 5. "Date:" More information on the type of service re- 6. Select the desired setting. quired may be displayed on the Control Dis- play. Automatic Service Request Via the Central Information Display (CID): Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automati- 1. "My MINI" cally transmitted to your dealer’s service 2. "Vehicle status" center before your vehicle is due for serv- 3. "Service required" ice. Required maintenance procedures and You can check when your dealer’s service legally mandated inspections are dis- center was notified. played. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- 1. "My MINI" mation. 2. "Vehicle status" Symbols 3. "Teleservice Call"

Symbols Description No service is currently re- Speed Limit Info quired. Speed Limit Info The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally Concept mandated inspection is ap- Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- proaching. mum permitted speed in the instrument The service deadline has al- cluster. ready passed. General information The camera at the base of the interior mir- Entering appointment dates ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle road as well as variable overhead sign posts. inspections. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet Make sure that the vehicle's date and time road conditions, etc., are also detected and are set correctly. compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 150

CONTROLS Displays

With the navigation system, the system Display takes into account the information stored in Speed Limit Info is displayed via the On- the navigation data and also displays speed board Computer. limits present on routes without signs. Without a navigation system, the system is subject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed.

Safety information Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed. WARNING Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info The system cannot serve as a substitute Display in the instrument cluster. for the driver’s personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. Speed Limit Info There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv- The last speed limit detected. ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where Without a navigation system appropriate. the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway. Overview With navigation system: Camera Speed Limit Info is not available.

Without navigation system: no speed limit or cancellation is detected.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in The camera is installed near the interior the Head-up Display. mirror. System limits Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 151

Displays CONTROLS

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- Activating a list and adjusting the fall. setting – When signs are fully or partially con- cealed by objects, stickers or paint. Button on the Function – When driving very close to the vehicle steering wheel in front of you. Move selection up. – When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections. Move selection – When the windshield in front of the in- down. terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. Confirm the selection. – In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. – If the speed limits stored in the naviga- Display tion system are incorrect. – In areas not covered by the navigation system. – When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. – When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. – If the traffic signs are non-conforming. – When signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected. – During calibration of the camera imme- Onboard Computer diately after vehicle delivery. Concept The Onboard Computer displays different Selection lists vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values. General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following: – Current audio source. – Redial phone feature. – Turn on voice activation system.

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 152

CONTROLS Displays

Calling up information on the Info Time of arrival. Display When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. – Speed Limit Info. – Speed. The unit of some information can be changed. Setting units, refer to page 57.

Selecting information Press and hold button on signal lever. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you Information is displayed in the Info Display can select what information from the On- of the instrument cluster. board Computer can be displayed on the Info Display of the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Information at a glance 1. "My MINI" Info Display 2. "System settings" Repeatedly pressing the but- 3. "Displays" ton on the turn signal lever 4. "Instrument panel" calls up the following information in the Info Display: 5. Select the desired setting. – Total range. Settings are stored for the profile currently – Range, electric. used. – Average consumption, fuel. Information in detail – Average consumption, electric. – Current consumption, fuel. Range – Current consumption, electric. Displays the estimated cruising range avail- – Average speed. able with the remaining fuel. – Charge state of the high-voltage battery. The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. – Date. – Engine temperature display. High-voltage battery charge indicator – With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation: Concept Distance to destination. Indicates the current charge state of the When destination guidance is activated high-voltage battery as a percentage. in the navigation system. – With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation:

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 153

Displays CONTROLS

Safety information Resetting average values

WARNING Even when it is indicated that the high- voltage battery is discharged, the high- voltage system is always still under high voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change live parts, for instance orange high-voltage cables, even when the batteries are discharged. Press and hold button on turn signal lever. Display Engine temperature display

Concept Displays the current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil temperature. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.

A marking is displayed when SAVE BAT- General information TERY is activated; see arrow. The marking indicates the high-voltage battery charge If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en- state that is to be maintained or achieved gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes- by means of energy recovery. sage is displayed too. When the engine temperature is too Average fuel consumption high, a red indicator light is dis- This is calculated for the period while the played. engine is running. When the engine oil temperature is The average fuel consumption is calculated too high, a red indicator light is dis- for the distance traveled since the last reset played. by the Onboard Computer. Check the coolant level, refer to page 290. Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not in- cluded in the calculation of the average speed.

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 154

CONTROLS Displays

Display General information Two types of Onboard Computers are available on the Control Display: – "Onboard info": average values, such as the fuel consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually. – "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a certain distance and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or With equipment version with Head-up trip computer Display and navigation: distance to Via the Central Information Display (CID): destination The distance remaining to the destination is 1. "My MINI" displayed if a destination is entered in the 2. "Driving information" navigation system before the trip is started. 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" The distance to the destination is adopted automatically. Resetting the Onboard Computer With equipment version with Head-up Via the Central Information Display (CID): Display and navigation: time of arrival 1. "My MINI" The estimated time of arrival is displayed if 2. "Driving information" a destination is entered in the navigation 3. "Onboard info" system before the trip is started. 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" The time must be correctly set. 5. "OK" Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- Resetting the trip computer mum permitted speed in the instrument Via the Central Information Display (CID): cluster. 1. "My MINI" Onboard Computer on the Control 2. "Driving information" Display 3. "Trip computer" 4. Move the Controller to the left, if Concept needed. The Onboard Computer displays different – "Reset": all values are reset. vehicle data on the Control Display, such as – "Automatic reset": all values are average values. reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill. 5. If necessary, "OK"

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 155

Displays CONTROLS

Driving Excitement Checking vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID): Concept 1. "My MINI" On the Control Display, sport instruments 2. "Technology in action" can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT 3. "Sport displays" program. 4. "Vehicle and surroundings" Via the MINI Driving Modes switch: Sport instruments 1. Activate SPORT. General information 2. "Sport displays" On the Control Display, values for power 3. "Vehicle and surroundings" and torque are displayed. Displaying sport instruments Speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Concept 2. "Technology in action" A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued. 3. "Sport displays" 4. "Sports instruments" General information Via MINI Driving Modes switch: The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed 1. Activate SPORT. exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 2. "Sport displays" 3. "Sports instruments" Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning Vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID): The following vehicle and surrounding area data is automatically checked and evaluated 1. "My MINI" in succession: 2. "Vehicle settings" – Range. 3. "Speed warning" – Engine temperature. 4. "Warning at:" – External temperature. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired – SPORT program state. speed is displayed. Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle 6. Press the Controller. state is displayed.

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 156

CONTROLS Displays

Activating/deactivating the speed Example: tachometer warning Like the tachometer in the instrument clus- Via the Central Information Display (CID): ter, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and 1. "My MINI" the respective RPM warning thresholds. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" Display 4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" – Arrow 1: current RPM. 4. "Select current speed" – Arrow 2: prewarning field. – Arrow 3: warning field. LED ring on the central in- Switching on/off LED ring strument cluster Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Concept 2. "System settings" The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions. 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" Basic displays 5. "Center Instrument" Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if Adjusting the LED ring so desired. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Event displays 1. "My MINI" Functions that are only displayed tempora- 2. "System settings" rily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays. 3. "Displays" Several vehicle assistance functions can 4. "Center Instrument" also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis- 5. "Basic display" or "Event display" play corresponds with the displays of the 6. Select the desired setting. function in the respective display.

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 157

Displays CONTROLS

Setting the brightness The brightness can be adjusted when night NOTICE lighting is active in the instrument cluster. The Head-up Display consists of sensitive Via the Central Information Display (CID): components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to 1. "My MINI" property. Do not place any objects on the 2. "System settings" Head-up Display, attach to system components or plug into the system. Do not 3. "Displays" move the moving parts manually. 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Brightness at night" Overview 6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Head-up Display

Concept Switching the Head-up Display This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance on/off the speed. When switching on, the projection lens of The driver can get information without the Head-up Display is extended. When averting his or her eyes from the road. switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again. General information Via the Central Information Display (CID): Follow the instructions for cleaning the 1. "My MINI" Head-up Display. For additional informa- 2. "System settings" tion, see the chapter on care. 3. "Displays" Safety information 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Head-Up Display" WARNING When extending and retracting the projec- Display tion screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in- Overview jury. Make sure that the area of movement The following information is displayed on of the projection screen is clear during the Head-up Display: opening and closing. – Speed.

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 158

CONTROLS Displays

– Navigation instructions. The setting is stored for the driver profile – Check Control messages. currently used. – Selection list from the instrument cluster. Adjusting the height – Driver assistance systems. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Some of this information is only displayed 1. "My MINI" briefly as needed. 2. "System settings" Selecting displays in the Head-up 3. "Displays" Display 4. "Head-Up Display" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 5. "Height" 1. "My MINI" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached. 2. "System settings" 7. Press the Controller. 3. "Displays" The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Head-Up Display" currently used. 5. "Displayed information" The height of the Head-up Display can also 6. Select the desired displays in the Head- be stored using the memory function, refer up Display. to page 107. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be Setting the brightness rotated around its own axis. The brightness is automatically adjusted to Via the Central Information Display (CID): the ambient brightness. 1. "My MINI" The basic setting can be adjusted manually. 2. "System settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Displays" 1. "My MINI" 4. "Head-Up Display" 2. "System settings" 5. "Rotation" 3. "Displays" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set- 4. "Head-Up Display" ting is selected. 5. "Brightness" 7. Press the Controller. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired The setting is stored for the driver profile brightness is set. currently used. 7. Press the Controller. Display visibility When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be The visibility of the displays in the Head-up additionally influenced using the instru- Display is influenced by the following fac- ment lighting, refer to page 165. tors:

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 159

Displays CONTROLS

– Certain sitting positions. Display of the Country Timer – Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- play. Overview – Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. – Wet roads. – Unfavorable light conditions.

Country timer

Concept – Symbols for road gradient and uneven- The system provides information on how ness, arrow 1. long and to what degree the vehicle was – Category, arrow 2. driven on inclined, uneven, unpaved or snow-covered roads, for example. – Pulse value, arrow 3. General information Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse value The system consists of the following two menus: When the vehicle is being driven on inclined or uneven roads, the corresponding – Country Timer: display of the gradient symbol lights up, arrow 1. One or more and unevenness of the routes traveled. pulse deflections are displayed and the – Country Timer Info: display of the best pulse value increases, arrow 3. time and total time since the last reset. Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads, Categories refer to page 244. As the pulse value increases, the vehicle becomes larger and reaches various levels, ar- Opening the menu row 2. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Display of the Country Timer Info 1. "My MINI" 2. "MINI Country Timer" Best time 3. Select the desired setting. The shortest driving time necessary to – : display of the Country Timer. reach the highest level. – : display of the Country Timer Info. Total time The total driving time that the vehicle was driven at the highest level.

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 160

CONTROLS Displays

Resetting the Country Timer Info Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "MINI Country Timer" 3. "MINI Country Timer Info" 4. Select desired setting: – "Reset record time and display": resetting the best time. – "Reset total time": resetting the total time.

Vehicle status

General information The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems. Opening the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance – "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 176. – "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 171. – "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil level check, refer to page 286. – "Check Control": Check Control messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 145. – "Service required": Displaying service requirements, refer to page 148. – "Teleservice Call": service request.

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 161

Lights CONTROLS

Lights

Vehicle features and options Symbol Function Lights off. This chapter describes all standard, country- Daytime running lights. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are Parking lights. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Low beams. functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. Instrument lighting.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off. Parking lights The light switch element is located next to Position of switch: the steering wheel. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Symbol Function Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become Rear fog light. discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. Front fog lights. Canada: when parking, switch on the one- sided roadside parking light, refer to page 162. Automatic headlight control. Low beams Cornering light. Position of switch:

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 162

CONTROLS Lights

The low beams light up when the ignition is Via the Central Information Display (CID): switched on. 1. "My MINI" Canada: roadside parking light 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" Concept 4. "Exterior lighting" The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. 5. "Welcome lights" Switching on The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. Headlight courtesy delay feature

General information The low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the high beams are switched on after radio-ready state is switched off. Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for With radio-ready state switched off, press a particular time if the headlight flasher is the lever either up or down past the resist- switched on after radio-ready state is ance point for approx. 2 seconds. switched off. Setting the duration Switching off Via the Central Information Display (CID): Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" Welcome lights and headlight 4. "Exterior lighting" courtesy delay feature 5. "Pathway lighting" Welcome lights 6. Set length of time. The setting is stored for the driver profile General information currently used. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when Automatic headlight control the vehicle is unlocked. Concept Activating/deactivating The low beams are switched on and off au- Position of switch: , tomatically depending on the ambient brightness, for instance in tunnels, in twi- light or if there is precipitation.

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 163

Lights CONTROLS

General information Cornering light A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. General information Activating Position of switch: In tight curves, for instance on mountain- Position of switch: ous roads or when turning, an additional, The indicator light in the instrument cluster cornering light is switched on that lights up is illuminated when the low beams are the inside of the curve when the vehicle is switched on. moving below a certain speed. The cornering light is automatically System limits switched on depending on the steering an- The automatic headlight control cannot gle or the use of turn signals. serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to de- Adaptive headlight range con- tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- trol tions, switch the light on manually. The adaptive headlight range control com- pensates for acceleration and braking oper- Daytime running lights ations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination General information of the roadway. Position of switch: , , The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the igni- High-beam Assistant tion is switched off, the parking lights light up in position . Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traf- Activating/deactivating fic participants early on and automatically In some countries, daytime running lights switches the high beams on or off depend- are mandatory, so it may not be possible to ing on the traffic situation. deactivate the daytime running lights. Via the Central Information Display (CID): General information The high-beam Assistant ensures that the 1. "My MINI" high beams are switched on, whenever the 2. "Vehicle settings" traffic situation allows. In the low speed 3. "Lighting" range, the high beams are not switched on by the system. 4. "Exterior lighting" The system responds to light from oncom- 5. Select the desired setting. ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, Settings are stored for the remote control and to ambient lighting, for instance in currently used. towns and cities.

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 164

CONTROLS Lights

The high beams can be switched on and off – In very unfavorable weather conditions, manually at any time. such as fog or heavy precipitation. – When detecting poorly-lit road users Activating/deactivating such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings. – In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres- sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways. – In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs. – When the windshield in front of the in- Position of switch, depending on the vehicle terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- equipment: , ered with stickers, etc. Press and hold button on signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument Fog lights cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on. Front fog lights The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams. Concept The blue indicator light in the instru- The front fog lights work alongside the low ment cluster lights up when the sys- beams to illuminate a wider area of the tem switches on the high beams. roadway. The high-beam Assistant is deactivated Functional requirement when manually switching the high beams The low beams must be switched on before on and off, refer to page 125. switching on the front fog lights. To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever. Switching on/off System limits Press button. The green indicator light lights up if The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a the front fog lights are switched on. substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In sit- If the automatic headlight control, refer to uation that require this, therefore switch off page 162, is activated, the low beams will manually. come on automatically when you switch on The system is not fully functional in the fol- the front fog lights. lowing situations, and driver intervention When the high beams or headlight flasher may be necessary: are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 165

Lights CONTROLS

Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off Press button. Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button switched on to adjust the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds. Settings Switching the reading lights on and Adjust the brightness with the off manually thumbwheel. Press button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light. Ambient light Interior lights General information General information Depending on the equipment version, light- Depending on the equipment, the interior ing can be adjusted for some lights in the lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- car's interior. tesy lights are controlled automatically. Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting Activating/deactivating controls brightness of some of these fea- Via the Central Information Display (CID): tures. 1. "My MINI" Overview 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Ambient lighting" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color 1 Interior lights Push the switch forward or back: 2 Reading lights manual color change. 3 Ambient light Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 166

CONTROLS Lights

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Adjust the brightness.

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 167

Safety CONTROLS

Safety

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag

Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the front passenger by responding to frontal the side of the body in the chest and lap impacts in which safety belts alone would area. not provide adequate protection.

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 168

CONTROLS Safety

Head airbag feet and legs in the floor area and does In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports not support them on the dashboard. the head. – Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. Ejection Mitigation – There should be no additional persons, The head airbag system is designed as an animals or objects between an airbag ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- and a person. duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle – Dashboard and windshield on the front occupants through side windows during passenger side must stay clear - do not rollovers or side impact events. attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for in- Knee airbag stance for GPS devices or mobile The knee airbag supports the legs in a fron- phones. tal impact. – Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them Protective action or modify them in any way. Airbags are not triggered in every impact – Do not use the cover of the front airbag situation, for instance in less severe acci- on the front passenger side as a storage dents or rear-end collisions. area. – Do not place slip covers, seat cushions Information on optimum effect of the or other objects on the front passenger airbags seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags. – Do not place seat cushions or other ob- WARNING jects on the front seats that are not spe- If the seat position is incorrect or the de- cifically suited for seats with integrated ployment area of the airbags is impaired, side airbags. the airbag system cannot provide protec- – Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as tion as intended and may cause additional jackets, over the backrests. injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in- – Never modify either the individual com- formation on achieving the optimum pro- ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys- tective effect of the airbag system. tem. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats. – Keep a distance from the airbags. – Do not remove the airbag system. – Always grasp the steering wheel on the Even when you follow all instructions very steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at closely, injury from contact with the airbags the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa- keep the risk of injury to your hands or tions. arms as low as possible when the airbag The ignition and inflation noise may lead to is triggered. short-term and, in most cases, temporary – Make sure that the front passenger is hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS

tact MINI Customer Relations for further in- Automatic deactivation of the formation. front-seat passenger airbags Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat Functional readiness of the airbag is occupied by measuring the human body's system resistance. Front, knee, and side airbag on the front Safety information passenger's side are activated or deactivated. WARNING Individual components can be hot after General information triggering of the airbag system. There is a Before transporting a child on the front pas- risk of injury. Do not touch individual senger seat, refer to the safety information components. and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

WARNING Safety information Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional trigger- WARNING ing of the airbag system. In the case of a To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag malfunction, the airbag system might not function, the system must be able to de- trigger as intended despite the accident tect whether a person is sitting in the severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan- front passenger seat. The entire seat cush- ger to life. Have the airbag system ion area must be used for this purpose. checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. ped by a dealer’s service center or another Make sure that the front passenger keeps qualified service center or repair shop. his or her feet in the floor area.

Correct function Malfunction of the automatic When the ignition is switched on, deactivation system the warning light in the instrument When transporting older children and cluster lights up briefly and thereby adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may indicates the operational readiness of the be deactivated in certain sitting positions. entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. In this case, the indicator light for the front- seat passenger airbags lights up. Airbag system malfunctioning In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- – Warning light does not come on when tivated and the indicator light goes out. the ignition is switched on. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, – The warning light lights up continu- have the person sit in the rear. ously.

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety

To enable correct recognition of the occu- Detected child restraint systems pied seat cushion. The system generally detects children – Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats seated in a child restraint system, particu- or other items to the front passenger larly in child restraint systems required by seat unless they are specifically deter- NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi- mined to be safe for use on the front cle was manufactured. After installing a passenger seat. child restraint system, make sure that the – Do not place any electronic devices on indicator light for the front-seat passenger the front passenger seat if a child re- airbags lights up. This indicates that the straint system is to be installed on it. child restraint system has been detected – Do not place objects under the seat that and the front-seat passenger airbags are not could press against the seat from below. activated. – No moisture in or on the seat. Strength of the driver's and front- Indicator light for the front-seat seat passenger airbag passenger airbags The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. WARNING The light indicates whether the airbags are There is a risk of jamming when moving either activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the – The indicator light lights area of movement of the seat is clear prior up when a child is properly to any adjustment. seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is empty. The airbags on the displayed. front passenger side are not activated. 1. Move the respective seat all the way forward. – The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated 2. Move the respective seat forward again. person of sufficient size is detected on The seat moves forward briefly. the seat. The airbags on the front pas- 3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi- senger side are activated. tion.

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS

The calibration procedure is completed Status display when the Check Control message disap- pears. Current status If the message continues to be displayed, The system status can be displayed on the repeat the calibration. Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys- If the message does not disappear after a re- tem is active. peat calibration, have the system checked Via the Central Information Display (CID): as soon as possible. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The current status is displayed. Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure Tire conditions in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure General information in one or more tires. Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message General information on the Control Display. Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the All wheels green model, the tire temperature. System is active and will issue a warning re- With use of the system follow further infor- lated to the tire inflation pressures stored mation found under Tire inflation pressure, during the last reset. refer to page 266. One to four yellow wheels Functional requirements A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation The following conditions must be met for pressure has occurred in the indicated tires. the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: Gray wheels – After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- It may not be possible to identify tire infla- set was performed with the correct tire tion pressure losses. inflation pressure. Possible causes: – After the tire inflation pressure was ad- – Malfunction. justed to a new value, a reset was performed. – The system is being reset. – Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. Additonal information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety

Resetting the system equipped with normal tires. Follow the in- Via the Central Information Display (CID): formation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" If a tire inflation pressure check is 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" required 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. Message 5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using "Perform reset". A symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. 6. Drive away. The wheels are displayed in gray and the Symbol Possible cause following is displayed "Resetting Tire The system has detected a Pressure Monitor…". wheel change, but no reset was After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h done. for a short period, the set tire inflation pres- No reset was performed for the sures are accepted as reference values. The system. The system issues a resetting process is completed automati- warning based on the tire infla- cally while driving. tion pressures stored during the After successful completion of the reset, the last reset. tires appear in green on the Control Display Inflation was not carried out ac- and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label cording to specifications. for recommended pressures." is displayed. The tire inflation pressure has You may interrupt this trip at any time. fallen below the level of the last When you continue the reset resumes auto- reset. matically. Messages Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as General information needed. A low tire inflation pressure may cause the 2. Reset the system. DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Safety information Message A yellow warning light is illuminated WARNING in the instrument cluster. A damaged regular tire with low or miss- In addition, a symbol with a Check Control ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- message appears on the Control Display. dling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS

Symbol Possible cause Measure There is a tire inflation pressure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. loss. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with warning based on the tire infla- normal tires or run-flat tires. tion pressures stored during the Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are la- last reset. beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's Measure sidewall. 1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- Actions in the event of a flat tire ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. Normal tires 2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas 1. Identify the damaged tire. station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if neces- To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sary. sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. 3. Reset the system. If the tire inflation pressure in all four If there is a significant loss of tire tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- inflation pressure tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. Message If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor A yellow warning light is illuminated may not have been initialized. In this in the instrument cluster. case, initialize the system. In addition, a symbol with the affected tire If identification of flat tire damage is appears in a Check Control message on the not possible, please contact a dealer’s Control Display. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Symbol Possible cause 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire There is a flat tire or a major kit or by changing the wheel. loss in tire inflation pressure. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire No reset was performed for the kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. system. The system issues a In this case, have the electronics checked warning based on the tire infla- and replaced at the next opportunity. tion pressures stored during the last reset.

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety

Run-flat tires the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. Safety information Vehicle handling with damaged tires WARNING Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to Your vehicle handles differently with a conditions such as the following: run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, your lane stability when – Greater likelihood of swerving off braking is reduced, braking distances are course. longer and the self-steering properties will – Longer braking distances. change. There is a risk of an accident. – Changed self-steering properties. Drive moderately and do not exceed a Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Continued driving with a flat tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: the tire could come loose and cause an accident. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s neuvers. service center or another qualified service 2. Do not exceed a speed of center or repair shop. 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all System limits four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four Temperature tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- The tire inflation pressure depends on the tor may not have been reset. In this tire's temperature. case, perform the reset. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the Possible driving range with a tire inflation pressure. depressurized tire The tire inflation pressure is reduced when The distance for which it may be possible to the tire temperature falls again. drive safely varies depending on how the These circumstances may cause a warning vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road when temperatures fall very sharply. conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. Sudden tire pressure loss If the vehicle is loaded with an average The system cannot indicate sudden serious weight and used under favorable conditions, tire damage caused by external circumstances.

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 175

Safety CONTROLS

Failure to perform a reset with a tire pressure monitoring system The system does not function properly if a (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure reset has not been carried out, for instance telltale when one or more of your tires is a flat tire is reported though tire inflation significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, pressures are correct. when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the Malfunction proper pressure. Driving on a significantly The yellow warning light flashes and under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- is then illuminated continuously. A heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla- Check Control message is displayed. tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire It may not be possible to identify tire pres- tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- sure losses. dling and stopping ability. Please note that Examples and recommendations in the fol- the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire lowing situations: maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even is mounted: have it checked by a deal- if under-inflation has not reached the level er’s service center or another qualified to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire service center or repair shop as needed. pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica- – Malfunction: have system checked by a tor to indicate when the system is not oper- dealer’s service center or another quali- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- fied service center or repair shop. cator is combined with the low tire pressure – The system was unable to complete the telltale. When the system detects a mal- reset. Perform a system reset again. function, the telltale will flash for approxi- – Interference caused by systems or devi- mately one minute and then remain contin- ces with the same radio frequency: after uously illuminated. This sequence will leaving the area of the interference, the continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups system automatically becomes active as long as the malfunction exists. When the again. malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal Declaration according to NHTSA/ low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring functions may occur for a variety of rea- System sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the Each tire, including the spare (if provided) vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- should be checked monthly when cold and tioning properly. Always check the TPMS inflated to the inflation pressure recom- malfunction telltale after replacing one or mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en- vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- sure that the replacement or alternate tires bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to size than the size indicated on the vehicle function properly. placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 176

CONTROLS Safety

FTM Flat Tire Monitor – After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted. Concept – After a tire or wheel replacement. The system detects tire inflation pressure Performing initialization loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while When initializing, the set tire inflation driving. pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, by confirming the tire inflation pressures. the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. Do not initialize the system when driving The difference will be detected and reported with snow chains. as a flat tire. Via the Central Information Display (CID): The system does not measure the actual in- 1. "My MINI" flation pressure in the tires. 2. "Vehicle status" Functional requirements 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The following conditions must be met for 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: reset". – After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- 6. Drive away. tialization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. – After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization The initialization automatically continues was performed. when driving resumes. Status display Messages The current status of the flat tire monitor General information can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" Safety information 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" WARNING The status is displayed. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts han- Initialization required dling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited An initialization must be performed in the stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do following situations: not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in-

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 177

Safety CONTROLS

formation on run-flat tires and continued If identification of flat tire damage is driving with these tires. not possible, please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Indication of a flat tire 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire A yellow warning light is illuminated kit or by changing the wheel. in the instrument cluster. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In addition, a symbol with a Check Control In this case, have the electronics checked message appears on the Control Display. and replaced at the next opportunity. Symbol Possible cause Run-flat tires There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Safety information

Measure WARNING 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Your vehicle handles differently with a Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; neuvers. for instance, your lane stability when 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with braking is reduced, braking distances are normal tires or run-flat tires. longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are la- Drive moderately and do not exceed a beled with a circular symbol containing speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. Maximum speed Actions in the event of a flat tire You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Continued driving with a flat tire To do this, check the tire inflation pres- If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: sure in all four tires, for instance using 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. neuvers. If the tire inflation pressure in all four 2. Do not exceed a speed of tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- 50 mph/80 km/h. tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor If the tire inflation pressure in all four may not have been initialized. In this tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor case, initialize the system. may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 178

CONTROLS Safety

Possible driving range with a – Sudden serious tire damage caused by depressurized tire external circumstances cannot be recog- The distance for which it may be possible to nized in advance. drive safely varies depending on how the – When the system has not been initial- vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road ized. conditions, external temperature. The driv- – When driving on a snowy or slippery ing range may be less but may also be more road surface. if an economical driving style is used. – Sporty driving style: spinning traction If the vehicle is loaded with an average wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift- weight and used under favorable conditions, ing). the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. – When driving with snow chains.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will Intelligent Safety handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Concept – Greater likelihood of swerving off Intelligent Safety enables central operation course. of the driver assistance system. – Longer braking distances. The intelligent safety systems can help pre- – Changed self-steering properties. vent an imminent collision. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt – Approach control warning with City steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- light braking function, refer to cles, for instance curbs or potholes. page 179. – Person warning with City light braking Final tire failure function, refer to page 182. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Safety information Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- WARNING dent. The system cannot serve as a substitute Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s for the driver’s personal judgment in as- service center or another qualified service sessing visibility and traffic situation. center or repair shop. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traf- System limits fic closely and actively intervene where The system could be delayed or malfunction appropriate. in the following situations: – A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 179

Safety CONTROLS

Adjust as needed. The individual settings WARNING are stored for the driver profile currently in Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a use. substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might Press button again: not output warnings or reactions or these – All Intelligent Safety systems might be output late, incorrectly, or with- are switched on. out justification. There is a risk of an acci- – The LED lights up green. dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Hold down button: intervene where appropriate. – All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Overview – The LED goes out.

Button in the vehicle Approach control warning with city light braking function

Concept The system can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. Intelligent Safety button The system sounds a warning before an imminent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed. Switching on/off The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some A camera at the base of the interior mirror Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- controls the system. ing to the last setting. The approach control warning is available Press button briefly: even if cruise control has been deactivated. – The menu for the intelligent With the vehicle approaching another vehi- safety system is displayed. The cle intentionally, the approach control warn- systems are individually ing and braking are delayed in order to switched off according to their avoid false system reactions. respective settings. General information – LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from ap-

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 180

CONTROLS Safety

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may Overview vary with the current driving situation. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up Button in the vehicle to 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Intelligent Safety button

Objects that the system can detect are Camera taken into account.

Safety information

WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traf- The camera is installed near the interior fic closely and actively intervene where mirror. appropriate. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

WARNING Switching on/off Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judg- Switching on automatically ment. Due to its limits, the system might The system is automatically active after ev- not output warnings or reactions or these ery driving off. might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- Switching on/off manually tions. Watch traffic closely and actively Press button briefly: intervene where appropriate. – The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 181

Safety CONTROLS

switched off according to their Symbol Measure respective settings. Symbol lights up red: prewarn- – LED lights up orange or goes out respec- ing. tive to their individual settings. Brake and increase distance. Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in Symbol flashes red and an use. acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Press button again: Brake and make an evasive ma- – All Intelligent Safety systems neuver, if necessary. are switched on. – The LED lights up green. Prewarning Hold down button: This warning is issued, for instance when there is the impending danger of a collision – All Intelligent Safety systems or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too are switched off. small. – The LED goes out. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. Setting the warning time Acute warning with braking function The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID). Acute warning is displayed in case of the imminent danger of a collision when the ve- 1. "My MINI" hicle approaches another object at a high 2. "Vehicle settings" differential speed. 3. "Intelligent Safety" The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the 4. "Warning time" driver is assisted by a minor automatic 5. Select the desired setting. braking intervention in a possible risk of The selected warning time is stored for the collision. driver profile currently in use. Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning. Warning with braking function Braking intervention Display The warning prompts the driver to react. A warning symbol appears in the instru- During a warning, the maximum braking ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a force is used. Prerequisite for the brake collision with a detected vehicle is immi- booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently nent. hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking.When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 182

CONTROLS Safety

The braking intervention occurs only if ve- – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- hicle stability has not been restricted, fall. for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy- – In tight curves. namic Stability Control. – If the field of view of the camera or the The driver may cancel the braking interven- windshield are dirty or covered. tion by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. – If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. Object detection can be restricted. Follow the limitations of the detection range and – Up to 10 seconds after the start of the functional restrictions. engine via the Start/Stop button. – During calibration of the camera imme- System limits diately after vehicle delivery. – If there are constant blinding effects be- Safety information cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

WARNING Warning sensitivity The system can react not at all, too late, in- The more sensitive the warning settings correctly, or without justification due to are, the more warnings are displayed. the system limits. There is a risk of acci- Therefore, there may also be an excess of dents or risk of damage to property. Follow premature or unjustified warnings and reac- the information regarding the system lim- tions. its and actively intervene if needed.

Detection range Person warning with City The system's detection potential is limited. light braking function Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. Concept E.g., the following situations may not be de- The system can help prevent accidents with tected: pedestrians. – Slow moving vehicles when you ap- When driving at city speeds, the system proach them at high speed. will issue a warning if there is imminent – Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. port this with a light braking function. – Vehicles with an unusual rear appear- The camera at the base of the interior mir- ance. ror controls the system. – Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. General information Functional limitations With sufficient brightness, the system The system may not be fully functional in warns about possible collision danger with the following situations: pedestrians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before a collision.

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 183

Safety CONTROLS

The system reacts to people who are within might be output late, incorrectly, or with- the detection range of the system. out justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- Detection range tions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas: – Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. – Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area. Intelligent Safety button A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located Camera within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv- The camera is installed near the interior ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traf- mirror. fic closely and actively intervene where Keep the windshield in front of the interior appropriate. mirror clean and clear.

WARNING Switching on/off Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Switching on automatically substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might The system is automatically active after ev- not output warnings or reactions or these ery driving off.

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 184

CONTROLS Safety

Switching on/off manually a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking.When the vehicle is traveling Press button briefly: at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a – The menu for the intelligent complete stop. safety system is displayed. The The braking intervention occurs only if ve- systems are individually hicle stability has not been restricted, switched off according to their for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy- respective settings. namic Stability Control. – LED lights up orange or goes out respec- The driver may cancel the braking interven- tive to their individual settings. tion by stepping on the accelerator pedal or Adjust as needed. The individual settings by actively moving the steering wheel. are stored for the driver profile currently in Object detection can be restricted. Follow use. the limitations of the detection range and Press button again: functional restrictions. – All Intelligent Safety systems System limits are switched on. – The LED lights up green. Safety information Hold down button: – All Intelligent Safety systems WARNING are switched off. The system can react not at all, too late, in- – The LED goes out. correctly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow Warning with braking function the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene if needed. Display If a collision with a person detected in this Detection range way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head- The detection potential of the camera is lim- up Display. ited. The red symbol is displayed and a Thus, a warning might not be issued or be signal sounds. issued late. Intervene immediately by braking or E.g., the following situations may not be de- make an evasive maneuver. tected: – Partially covered pedestrians. Braking intervention – Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or The warning prompts the driver to react. contour. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Prerequisite for the brake – Pedestrians outside of the detection booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently range. hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 185

Safety CONTROLS

– Pedestrians having a body size less than General information 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. – In tight curves. – If the field of view of the camera or the – During normal brake application, the windshield are dirty or covered. brake lights light up. – If the driving stability control systems – During heavy brake application, the are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. flashers additionally light up. – Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. – During calibration of the camera imme- Alertness assistant diately after vehicle delivery. – If there are constant blinding effects be- Concept cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto- – When it is dark outside. nous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break. Brake force display Safety information Concept Additional brake lights indicate emergency WARNING braking to the traffic behind. This can re- The system cannot serve as a substitute duce the risk of a rear-end collision. for the driver’s personal judgment in as- sessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 186

CONTROLS Safety

After travel has begun, the system monitors The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af- certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be case of a break during longer trips on high- detected. ways. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: – Personal driving style, for instance PostCrash – iBrake steering behavior. – Driving conditions, for instance length Concept of trip. In the event of an accident, the system can Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, bring the vehicle to a halt automatically the system is active and can display a rec- without intervention by the driver in cer- ommendation to take a break. tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences Break recommendation thereof. If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Dis- At standstill play with the recommendation to take a After coming to a halt, the brake is released break. automatically. Secure the vehicle against A recommendation to take a break is dis- rolling. played only once during an uninterrupted trip. Harder vehicle braking After a break, another recommendation to It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in take a break cannot be displayed until after certain situations to a halt quicker. approximately 45 minutes. To do this, for a short time the braking pressure applied when stepping on the brake System limits pedal must be higher than the braking pres- The function may be limited in the follow- sure achieved by the automatic braking ing situations, for instance and will either function. This interrupts automatic braking. output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: Interrupting automatic braking – When the clock is set incorrectly. It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance – When the vehicle speed is mainly below for an evasive maneuver. about 43 mph/70 km/h. Interrupt automatic braking: – With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when corner- – By pressing the brake pedal. ing fast. – By pressing the accelerator pedal. – In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. – When the road surface is poor. – In the event of strong side winds.

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 187

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability Control

This chapter describes all standard, country- Concept specific and optional features offered with Within the physical limits, the system helps the series. It also describes features that are to keep the vehicle on a steady course by not necessarily available in your vehicle, reducing engine speed and by applying e. g., due to the selected options or country brakes to the individual wheels. versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these A change in the drive type, refer to page 70, functions and systems, the applicable laws can be made to improve traction. and regulations must be observed. General information DSC detects the following unstable driving Anti-lock Braking System ABS conditions, for instance: – Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer- ABS prevents locking of the wheels during ing. braking. – Loss of traction of the front wheels, The vehicle maintains its steering power which can lead to understeering. even during full brake applications, thus in- Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to creasing active safety. page 188, is a version of the DSC where for- ABS is operational every time you start the ward momentum is optimized. engine. Safety information

Brake assistant WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- for the driver’s personal judgment in as- tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- sessing the traffic situation. Based on the ing capability to the furthest possible ex- limits of the system, it cannot independ- tent. It reduces the braking distance to a ently react to all traffic situations. There is minimum during emergency stop. This sys- a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style tem utilizes all of the capabilities provided to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely by the Antilock Brake System ABS. and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 188

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

Activating DSC WARNING Press button. When driving with a roof load, for in- DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator stance with roof-mounted luggage rack, light go out. the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tip- ping in critical driving situations. There is Indicator/warning lights a risk of accidents or risk of damage to When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic played in the instrument cluster. Stability Control when driving with roof load. The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Indicator/warning lights Automatic activation The indicator light flashes: DSC con- When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa- trols the drive and braking forces. tion occurs in the following situations: The indicator light lights up: DSC has – The vehicle has a flat tire. malfunctioned. – When activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF General information DTC Dynamic Traction Con- Depending on the operating state of the trol high-voltage system, the drive of the vehicle automatically switches between front- wheel, rear-wheel and four-wheel drive. If Concept DSC is deactivated, this may result in auto- DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil- matic change of the drive type for unstable ity Control where forward momentum is op- driving situations. timized. When DSC is deactivated, driving stability The system ensures maximum headway on is reduced during acceleration and when special road conditions, for instance unp- driving in curves. lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC but with somewhat limited vehicle stability. again as soon as possible. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is lim- Deactivating DSC ited during acceleration and when driving Press and hold this button but not in curves. longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- Drive carefully. til the indicator light for DSC OFF You may find it useful to briefly activate lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- DTC under the following special circum- plays DSC OFF. stances: DSC is switched off.

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 189

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

– When driving in slush or on uncleared, Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch snow-covered roads. will activate the particular program. – When driving off from deep snow or loose ground. Operating the programs – When driving with snow chains. MINI Driving Modes switch Program Deactivating/activating DTC SPORT Dynamic Traction Control MID GREEN Activating DTC Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the in- MID strument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. MID provides balanced tuning. With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button. Deactivating DTC Press button again. GREEN TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light go out. Concept GREEN, refer to page 247, provides consistent tuning to maximize range. Performance Control Activating GREEN Performance Control enhances the agility of Press the MINI Driving Modes switch the vehicle. downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving Configuring GREEN style is used. Due to the variable drive configuration, this Via MINI Driving Modes switch intervention can be done either on the front 1. Activate GREEN. axle, the rear axle or on both axles simultaneously. 2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when MINI Driving Modes switch GREEN is activated.

Concept Via the Central Information Display (CID) The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to 1. "My MINI" fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. 2. "Vehicle settings" Choose between three different programs. 3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 190

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

4. "Configure GREEN" Drive-off assistant 5. Select the desired setting. This configuration is retrieved when Concept GREEN is activated. This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required. SPORT Driving off with the drive-off Concept assistant Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot for greater driving agility. brake. Activating SPORT 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- After the foot brake is released, the vehicle ment cluster. is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Configuring driving program Servotronic Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode: Servotronic is a speed-dependent power – GREEN, refer to page 189. steering function. Displays The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher Program selection ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering more direct Pressing the MINI Driving when driving at faster speeds. Modes switch displays a list of Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac- programs, which can be se- cording to the driving program, so that a di- lected. rect, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed. Selected program The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 191

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options General information A camera on the interior mirror is used to This chapter describes all standard, country- detect vehicles driving ahead. specific and optional features offered with Depending on the driving settings, the fea- the series. It also describes features that are tures of the cruise control can change in not necessarily available in your vehicle, certain areas. e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Safety information functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as- Camera-based cruise control sessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is Concept a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style Using this system, a desired speed and a to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted and actively intervene where appropriate. using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac- WARNING celerates or brakes automatically. The desired speed can be incorrectly ad- If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys- justed or called up by mistake. There is a tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so risk of an accident. Adjust the desired that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traf- maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as fic closely and actively intervene where the given situation allows. appropriate. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. WARNING With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic Risk of accident due to too high speed dif- transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you ferences to other vehicles, for instance in brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive the following situations: again shortly thereafter, the system is able – When fast approaching a slowly mov- to detect this within the given system lim- ing vehicle. its. – Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. – When fast approaching standing vehicles.

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 192

CONTROLS Driving comfort

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Button Function Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Increase speed, refer to page 193. Reduce speed, refer to page 193. WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- series, optional features and country speci- cle against rolling. fications. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the fol- Camera lowing: – Set the parking brake. – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. – On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. The camera is installed near the interior Overview mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior Buttons on the steering wheel mirror clean and clear. Button Function Functional requirements Cruise control on/off, refer to page 193. Speed range Store/maintain speed, refer to The system is best used on well-constructed page 193. roads. Pause cruise control, refer to The system is functional at speeds begin- page 193. ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Continue cruise control with the With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic last setting, refer to page 194. transmissions: the system can also be activated while the vehicle is stationary. Reduce distance, refer to page 194. The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h. Increase distance, refer to page 194.

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 193

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Switching on/off and interrupting – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- cruise control vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. Switching on – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes. Press button on the steering wheel. – If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy Display in the instrument cluster precipitation or glare effects from the lights up. sun. – With the Stop&Go function for Step- Display in the instrument cluster tronic transmissions: following a sta- lights up. The current speed is tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af- adopted as desired speed and dis- ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by played with symbol. the system. Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. Setting the speed DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched Maintaining/storing the speed on, if necessary. Press or button in the interrupted Switching off state. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic When the system is switched on, the cur- transmissions: when switching off while rent speed is maintained and stored as the stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta- desired speed. neously. The stored speed is displayed on the Press the button on the steering symbol. wheel. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. The speed can also be stored as follows: Press button. Interrupting manually Press button on the steering wheel. With the Stop&Go function for Step- Changing the speed tronic transmissions: when interrupting or button: press until the desired while stationary, depress the brake pedal si- speed is set. multaneously. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when Interrupting automatically the road is clear. The system is automatically interrupted in – or button: each time it is pressed the following situations: to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. – When the driver applies the brakes. 1 mph/1 km/h. – If selector lever position N is set.

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 194

CONTROLS Driving comfort

– or button: each time it is pressed Continuing cruise control past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ General information 10 km/h. An interrupted cruise control can be contin- or button: hold down to repeat the ued by calling up the stored speed. action. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large Adjusting distance before calling up the stored speed. Other- wise, unintentional braking or accelerating Safety information may occur. In the following cases, the stored speed WARNING value is deleted and cannot be called up The system cannot serve as a substitute again: for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to – When the system is switched off. the system limits, braking can be late. – When the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic sit- Calling up stored speed and distance uation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and Press button with the system inter- maintain the prescribed safety distance, rupted. Cruise control is continued possibly by braking. with the stored values. The selected distance is briefly displayed in the Info Dis- play. Reduce distance Press button repeatedly until the Switching distance control on/off desired distance is set. Safety information The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster. WARNING The system does not react to traffic driv- Increase distance ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There is a risk of acci- Press button repeatedly until the dents or risk of damage to property. Adjust desired distance is set. the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed. The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster. Switching distance control off Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated. Press and hold this button.

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 195

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Or: Distance display Press and hold this button. Distance 3

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up. Distance 4 This value is set automatically af- To switch distance control back on, press ter the system is switched on. one of the two buttons again briefly. After changing over distance control, a Detected vehicle Check Control message is displayed. Symbol lights up orange: Displays in the instrument cluster A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Desired speed and stored speed With the Stop&Go function for Step- In addition to the indicator light, the tronic transmissions: desired speed is displayed in the Info Rolling bars: the detected vehicle Display. has driven away. – Display lights up green: system is active, ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti- the display indicates the desired speed. vate ACC as follows: – Display lights up orange: system is in- – By briefly pressing the accelerator terrupted, the display indicates the pedal. stored speed. – By pressing the RES CNCL button. – No display: system is switched off. – By pressing the or button. If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled. Indicator/warning lights Symbol flashes orange: Distance to vehicle ahead of you The conditions are not adequate for Selected distance from the vehicle driving the system to work. ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand The system was deactivated but applies the portion of the Info Display. brakes until you actively resume control by Distance display pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Distance 1 Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: Distance 2 Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 196

CONTROLS Driving comfort

pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not de- Swerving vehicles tected.

Distance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

Displays in the Head-up Display The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis- A vehicle driving in front of you is not de- play. tected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. System limits If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not Detection range be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed. The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. With the Stop&Go function for Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might Steptronic transmissions: driving off not be detected. In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: Deceleration – On steep uphill grades. The system does not decelerate in the fol- – From bumps in the road. lowing situations: In these cases, press on the accelerator – For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly pedal. slow-moving road users. – For red traffic lights. – For cross traffic. – For oncoming traffic. – Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking lighting at night.

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 197

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Cornering Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions: – Wet conditions. – Snowfall. – Slush. – Fog. – Glare. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac- If the desired speed is too high for a curve, tively, for instance by braking, steering or the speed is reduced slightly, although evading. curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropri- Engine power ate speed. The desired speed may not be maintained The system has a limited detection range. on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- Situations can arise in tight curves where a cient. vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deactivated. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: – When an object was not correctly detected. – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. When you approach a curve the system may – In tight curves. briefly report vehicles in the next lane due – If the field of view of the camera or the to the bend of the curve. If the system de- windshield are dirty or covered. celerates you may compensate it by briefly – When driving toward bright lights. accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls – Up to 20 seconds after the start of the speed independently. engine, via the Start/Stop button. – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions: – Poorer vehicle recognition. – Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 198

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Cruise control Overview

Concept Buttons on the steering wheel Using this system, a desired speed can be Button Function adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired Cruise control on/off, refer to speed. The system accelerates and brakes page 198. automatically as needed. Store speed, refer to page 199.

General information Pause cruise control, refer to The system is functional at speeds begin- page 198. ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Continue cruise control with the Depending on the driving settings, the fea- last setting, refer to page 199. tures of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Increase speed, refer to page 199. Safety information Reduce speed, refer to page 199.

WARNING The system cannot serve as a substitute Switching on/off and interrupting for the driver’s personal judgment in as- cruise control sessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independ- Switching on ently react to all traffic situations. There is Press button on the steering wheel. a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

WARNING The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with The use of the system can lead to an in- the symbol in the instrument cluster. creased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance: Cruise control is active and maintains the – On winding roads. set speed. – In heavy traffic. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched – On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or on, if necessary. wet conditions, or on a loose road surface. Switching off There is a risk of accidents or risk of dam- Press button on the steering wheel. age to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 199

Driving comfort CONTROLS

The displays go out. The stored desired – or button: each time it is pressed speed is deleted. to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. Interrupting manually 1 mph/1 km/h. When active, press the button on – or button: each time it is pressed the steering wheel. past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h. Interrupting automatically – or button: pressing it to the re- The system is automatically interrupted in sistance point and holding it accelerates the following situations: or decelerates the vehicle without re- – When the driver applies the brakes. quiring pressure on the accelerator – If selector lever position N is set. pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Press- – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- ing the switch beyond the resistance vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control point causes the vehicle to accelerate is deactivated. more rapidly. – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes. Continuing cruise control

Setting the speed General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin- Maintaining/storing the speed ued by calling up the stored speed. Press or button in the interrupted Make sure that the difference between cur- state. rent speed and stored speed is not too large When the system is switched on, the cur- before calling up the stored speed. Other- rent speed is maintained and stored as the wise, unintentional braking or accelerating desired speed. may occur. The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster. Calling up stored speed DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched Press button on the steering wheel. on, if necessary. The speed can also be stored as follows: The stored speed is reached again and main- Press button. tained. Displays in the instrument cluster Changing the speed or button: press until the desired Indicator light speed is set. Depending on how the vehicle is If active, the displayed speed is stored and equipped, the indicator light in the the vehicle reaches the stored speed when instrument cluster indicates whether the road is clear. the system is switched on.

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 200

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Desired speed and stored speed – By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm The desired speed is displayed to- from the object. gether with the symbol. – By the rear middle sensors at ap- – Display lights up green: system is prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object. active, the display indicates the desired speed. – When a collision is imminent. – Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the Safety information stored speed. – No display: system is switched off. WARNING If no speed is indicated, it is possible that The system cannot serve as a substitute the conditions necessary for operation are for the driver’s personal judgment in as- not currently fulfilled. sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle System limits surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Engine power The desired speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained on uphill WARNING grades if engine power is insufficient. Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- tance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. PDC Park Distance Control There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object Concept too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active. PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in Overview front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob- jects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display. With front PDC: button in vehicle General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers. The maneuvering range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations: Park assistance button

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 201

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Ultrasound sensors Automatic deactivation during Ultrasound sensors of the forward travel PDC, for instance in the bump- The system switches off when a certain ers. driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off Functional requirements manually Ensure full functionality: Press park assistance button. – Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks. – On: the LED lights up. – Keep the sensors clean and unob- – Off: the LED goes out. structed. The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing Switching on/off the park assistance button. Switching on automatically WARNING The system switches on automatically in the following situations: Signal tones – If selector lever position R is engaged When approaching an object, an intermit- when the engine is running. tent sound indicates the position of the ob- The rearview camera also switches on. ject. E.g., if an object is detected to the left – With front PDC: when obstacles are de- rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds tected behind or in front of the vehicle from the left rear speaker. by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- The shorter the distance to the object, the prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. shorter the intervals. With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- If the distance to a detected object is less stacle detection can be switched off. Via the than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous Central Information Display (CID): tone is sounded. 1. "My MINI" With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind 2. "Vehicle settings" the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- 3. "Parking" nal is sounded. 4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending The signal tone is switched off, when selec- on the vehicle equipment. tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles 5. "Automatic PDC activation" with Steptronic transmission. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 202

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Volume Limits of ultrasonic measurement The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to Ultrasonic measuring might not function the entertainment volume can be adjusted. under the following circumstances: 1. "My MINI" – For small children and animals. 2. "System settings" – For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats. 3. "Tone" – With external interference of the ultra- 4. "Volume settings" sound, for instance from passing vehi- 5. "PDC" cles or loud machines. 6. Set the desired value. – When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used. – If cargo protrudes. – Under certain weather conditions such Visual warning as high relative humidity, wet condi- The approach of the vehicle to an object can tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong be shown on the Control Display. Objects wind. that are farther away are already displayed – With tow bars and trailer couplings of on the Control Display before a signal other vehicles. sounds. – With thin or wedge-shaped objects. A display appears as soon as Park Distance – With moving objects. Control (PDC) is activated. – With elevated, protruding objects such The range of the sensors is represented in as ledges or cargo. colors: red, green and yellow. – With objects with corners and sharp When the image of the rearview camera is edges. displayed, the switch can be made to PDC: – With objects with a fine surface struc- "Rear view camera" ture such as fences. – For objects with porous surfaces. System limits – Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind Safety information area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. WARNING The system can react not at all, too late, in- False warnings correctly, or without justification due to The system may issue a warning under the the system limits. There is a risk of acci- following conditions even though there is dents or risk of damage to property. Follow no obstacle within the detection range: the information regarding the system lim- – In heavy rain. its and actively intervene if needed. – When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. – When sensors are covered in snow.

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 203

Driving comfort CONTROLS

– On rough road surfaces. Safety information – On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. WARNING – In large buildings with right angles and The system cannot serve as a substitute smooth walls, for instance in under- for the driver’s personal judgment in as- ground garages. sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk – In automatic vehicle washes. of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf- – Due to heavy exhaust. fic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle – Due to other ultrasound sources, for in- surroundings closely and actively inter- stance sweeping machines, high pres- vene where appropriate. sure steam cleaners or neon lights. The malfunction is signaled by a contin- Overview uous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- Depending on the vehicle equipment: function due to other ultrasound sources button in the vehicle is no longer present, the system is again fully functional. With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Park assistance button Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display. Camera PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The The camera lens is located in the handle of area behind the vehicle is shown on the the tailgate. Control Display. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 204

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Switching on/off Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be Switching on automatically active at the same time. The system is switched on automatically if – Parking aid lines selector lever position R is engaged when "Parking aid lines" the engine is running. Lanes and turning radius are indicated. Automatic deactivation during – Obstacle marking forward travel "Obstacle marking" The system switches off when a certain Obstacles are marked, depending on the driving distance or speed is exceeded. vehicle equipment. Switch the system back on, if needed. Pathway lines Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually Press park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up. – Off: the LED goes out. The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display. Pathway lines can be superimposed on the Switching the view via the Central image of the rearview camera. Information Display (CID) Pathway lines help you to estimate the If the rearview camera view is not dis- space required when parking and maneu- played, change the view via the Central In- vering on level roads. formation Display (CID): Pathway lines depend on the current steer- "Rear view camera" ing angle and are continuously adjusted to The rearview camera image is displayed. the steering wheel movements. Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement – The rearview camera is switched on. – The tailgate is fully closed. – Keep the recording range of the camera clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 205

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Turning radius lines Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point Only one turning radius line is displayed af- where the pathway line covers the cor- ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer- responding turning radius line. tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Display settings

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta- Brightness cle markings can be faded into the image of With the rearview camera switched on: the rearview camera. 1. Select the symbol. The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ings match the markings of the PDC Park ting is reached and press the Controller. Distance Control. Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 206

CONTROLS Driving comfort

System limits The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of Detection of objects steering during the parking procedure. Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob- System status and instructions on required jects such as ledges may not be recognized actions are displayed on the Control Dis- by the system. play. Depending on the vehicle equipment, some A component of the parking assistant is the assistance functions also consider data from PDC Park Distance Control. the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Safety information Control chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Dis- WARNING play may be closer than they appear. There- The system cannot serve as a substitute fore, do not estimate the distance from the for the driver’s personal judgment in as- objects on the display. sessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is Parking assistant a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely Concept and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTICE The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis- tance Control applies in addition. This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road. Overview

General information Button in the vehicle Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: – Switching on and activating. – Parking space search. – Parking. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 207

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Park assistance button For parking – Doors and tailgate are closed. – The parking brake is released. Ultrasound sensors – When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on. Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button Press park assistance button. The LED lights up. The ultrasound sensors for measuring park- The current status of the parking space ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- search is indicated on the Control Display. ing. Parking assistant is activated automatically. Functional requirements Switching on with reverse gear Ultrasound sensors Shift into reverse. Ensure full functionality: The current status of the parking space – Do not cover sensors, for instance with search is indicated on the Control Display. stickers. To activate: "Parking Assistant" – Keep the sensors clean and unob- structed. Display on the Control Display

For measuring parking spaces System activated/deactivated – Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Symbol Meaning – Maximum distance to row of parked ve- Gray: the system is not availa- hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. ble. White: the system is available Suitable parking space but not activated. – Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m. The system is activated. – Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. – Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m. – Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 208

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Parking space search and system and at a distance of maximum status 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the display, refer to page 207. 3. Follow the instructions on the display. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move. The end of the parking procedure is in- – Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- dicated on the display. ing assistant is activated and the park- 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if ing space search is active. needed. – Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to Interrupting manually the vehicle symbol. When the parking The parking assistant can be interrupted at assistant is active, suitable parking any time: spaces are highlighted. – Press park assistance button. – The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been taken over by – "Parking Assistant" system. Interrupting automatically – Parking space search is always active The system is interrupted automatically in whenever the vehicle is moving forward the following situations: slow and straight, even if the system is – If the driver grasps the steering wheel deactivated. When the system is deacti- or takes over steering. vated, the displays on the Control Dis- – If a gear is selected that does not match play are shown in gray. the instruction on the display. – If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. Parking using the parking assistant 6 mph/10 km/h. Parking – Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. 1. Press the park assistance button or – If a maximum number of parking at- shift into reverse gear to switch on the tempts or the time taken for parking is parking assistant, refer to page 207. Ac- exceeded. tivate the parking assistant, if needed. – If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- Parking assistant is activated. plays clearances that are too small. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a – When switching into other functions of speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h the radio. A Check Control message is displayed.

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 209

Driving comfort CONTROLS

Resuming – With ditches or edges, for instance an An interrupted parking procedure can be edge of a port. continued, if needed. Limits of ultrasonic measurement Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 207, and follow the instructions on the Ultrasonic measuring might not function display. under the following circumstances: – For small children and animals. Switching off – For persons with certain clothing, for in- The system can be switched off as follows: stance coats. – Press park assistance button. – With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. – Switching off the ignition. – When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- System limits aged or out of position. – If cargo protrudes. Safety information – Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong WARNING wind. The system can react not at all, too late, in- – With tow bars and trailer couplings of correctly, or without justification due to other vehicles. the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow – With thin or wedge-shaped objects. the information regarding the system lim- – With moving objects. its and actively intervene if needed. – With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. No parking assistance – With objects with corners and sharp edges. The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: – With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences. – In tight curves. – For objects with porous surfaces. Functional limitations – Low objects already displayed, for in- The system may not be fully functional in stance curbs, can move into the blind the following situations: area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. – On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. – The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for park- – On slippery ground. ing. – With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. Tire size – With a mounted emergency wheel. The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 210

CONTROLS Driving comfort

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 211

Climate control CONTROLS

Climate control

Vehicle features and options – Emission tested car's interior. – Microfilter. This chapter describes all standard, country- – Air conditioning system to control the specific and optional features offered with temperature, air flow and recirculated- the series. It also describes features that are air mode. not necessarily available in your vehicle, Depending on the equipment specification: e. g., due to the selected options or country – Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these – Automatic climate control. functions and systems, the applicable laws – Parked-car ventilation. and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 212

CONTROLS Climate control

3 Temperature 7 Rear window defroster 4 Seat heating, right 102 8 Windshield defroster 5 Air conditioning 9 Seat heating, left 102 6 Recirculated-air mode

Climate control functions in detail Switching on/off Press button. Switching the system on/off The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on. Switching on Set any air flow. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is Switching off started. Turn the wheel for air flow all The air conditioner produces condensation the way to the left. water, refer to page 243, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Temperature Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- Concept tants in the immediate environment by tem- The system heats or cools, depending on the porarily suspending the supply of outside set temperature. air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. Settings Operation Turn the ring to set the desired temperature. Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode: – LED off: outside air flows in continuously. – LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup- Air conditioning ply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked. Concept To prevent window condensation, recircu- The air in the car's interior will be cooled lated-air mode switches off automatically af- and dehumidified and, depending on the ter a certain amount of time, depending on temperature setting, warmed again. the external temperature. The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C With constant recirculated-air mode, the air button with the engine running and/or with quality in the car's interior deteriorates and drive-ready state activated. the fogging of the windows increases.

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 213

Climate control CONTROLS

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu- Defrosting windows and removing lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if condensation needed. Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation: Controlling the air flow manually – Direct the air distribution onto the win- Concept dows. The air flow for climate control can be ad- – Increasing the air flow. justed manually. – Increase the temperature. – Switch on the air conditioning if needed. Operation Turn the ring to set the de- Windshield defroster sired air flow. Press button. The LED lights up. The higher the air flow, the The front window defroster more effective the heating or switches off automatically after a certain cooling will be. period of time. The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery Rear window defroster power. Press button. The LED lights up. Controlling the air distribution The rear window defroster switches manually off automatically after a certain period of time. Concept For permanent activation, press the button The air distribution for climate control can for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, be adjusted manually. press the button again. The rear window defroster can only be acti- Operation vated continuously at an external temperature below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃. Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater intermediate setting. output is reduced.

Microfilter – Windows. In external and recirculated-air mode the – Upper body region. microfilter filters dust and pollen from the – Floor area. air. – Windows, upper body region, and Have this filter changed during vehicle floor area. maintenance, refer to page 292.

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 214

CONTROLS Climate control

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling 2 Display 10 Air conditioning 3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Recirculated-air mode 4 AUTO program 12 Rear window defroster 5 Air distribution, manual 13 Windshield defroster 6 Display 14 Defrosting windows and removing con- 7 Temperature, right densation 8 Seat heating, right 102 15 Seat heating, left 102

Climate control functions in detail Switching off Turn wheel for air flow to the Switching the system on/off left until the control switches off. Switching on Set any air flow.

Temperature

Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 215

Climate control CONTROLS

necessary by using the maximum cooling or Maximum cooling heating power, and then keeps it constant. Concept Settings The system is set to the lowest temperature, Turn the ring to set the de- maximum air flow and recirculated-air sired temperature. mode.

General information The function is available with external tem- Do not rapidly switch between different peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and temperature settings. The automatic climate with the engine running. control will not have sufficient time to ad- Air flows out of the vents to the upper body just the set temperature. region. The vents need to be open for this. The air flow can be adjusted with the air Air conditioning flow active.

Concept Switching on/off The air in the car's interior will be cooled Press button. and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. The LED is illuminated with the system switched on. The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C button with the engine running and/or with The system is set to the lowest temperature, drive-ready state activated. optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

Switching on/off AUTO program Press button. Concept The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on. The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically. Depending on the weather, the windshield The air distribution and temperature are may fog up briefly when the engine is controlled automatically depending on the started. temperature in the car's interior and the de- The air conditioning is switched on auto- sired temperature setting including the se- matically with the AUTO program. lected intensity of the air flow. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 243, de- Switching on/off velops and drains underneath the vehicle. Press button. This is normal. The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on. Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 216

CONTROLS Climate control

air is directed to the windshield, side win- Switching on/off dows, upper body, and into the floor area. Press button repeatedly to select an The following features are switched on au- operating mode: tomatically with the AUTO program: – The air conditioning, refer to page 215. – LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribu- – Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air tion. control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automati- Intensity cally. With the AUTO program activated, the au- – Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the tomatic intensity control can be changed. supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked. Turn the ring to set the de- To prevent window condensation, recircu- sired intensity from soft to in- lated-air mode switches off automatically af- tensive. ter a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature. If windows are fogged over, switch off the The set intensity is displayed via the posi- recirculating mode and press the AUTO but- tion of the illuminated LED segment. ton. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode Controlling the air flow manually

Concept Concept The automatic recirculated-air control AUC The air flow for climate control can be ad- recognizes odors or pollutants in the out- justed manually. side air. The outside air supply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated. General information To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO General information program first. If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the Operation shut-off automatically. Turn the ring to set the de- If the system is deactivated, outside air con- sired air flow. tinuously flows into the car's interior. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases. The manually adjusted air flow is displayed You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- via illuminated LED segments. tants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside The air flow of the automatic climate con- air. The system then recirculates the air trol may be reduced automatically to save flow within the vehicle. battery power.

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 217

Climate control CONTROLS

Controlling the air distribution Windshield defroster manually Press button. The LED lights up. Concept The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain The air distribution for climate control can period of time. be adjusted manually.

Operation Rear window defroster Press button repeatedly to select a Press button. The LED lights up. program: The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of – Windows, upper body region, and floor time. area. For permanent activation, press the button – Upper body region and floor area. for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, – Floor area. press the button again. – Windows and floor area. The rear window defroster can only be acti- – Windows. vated continuously at an external tempera- – Windows and upper body region. ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃. – Upper body region. When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater output is reduced. Defrosting windows and removing condensation Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode the Concept microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters Ice and condensation are quickly removed dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of from the windshield and the front side win- the air. dows. Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 292. Switching on/off Press button. The LED is illuminated with the Ventilation system switched on. Ice and condensation are quickly removed Setting from the windshield and the front side win- The air flow directions can be individually dows. adjusted: The air flow can be adjusted with the air – Direct ventilation: flow active. The air flow is directly pointed onto the If there is window condensation, switch on person. The air flow heats or cools no- the air conditioning too. ticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature. – Indirect ventilation:

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 218

CONTROLS Climate control

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the The system automatically cools, vents, and air is directly routed into the car's inte- heats depending on the ambient and set rior. temperature. Snow and ice may be removed more easily. Front ventilation General information The stationary climate control can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time: – Direct operation, refer to page 219. – Preselected departure times, refer to page 219. The air automatically exits through the vents to the windshield, the side windows, – Turn knob for continuous opening and the upper body region and into the floor closing of the vents. area. – Swivel the vents to alter the direction of The system switches off automatically after the vent flow, arrows. a certain period of time. If stationary climate control is used during Ventilation in the rear the charging process, less air conditioning capacity will be required while driving. This optimizes the range. Functional requirements – Motor switched off and/or drive-ready state deactivated. – High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or charging cable connected. If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis- – Lever for changing the air flow direc- charged, it can take some time after con- tion, arrow 1. necting the charging cable, until the stationary climate control will be – Thumbwheel for variable opening and functional. closing of the vents, arrow 2. – Direct operation or departure time preselected: depends on internal, external, and set desired temperature. Stationary climate control Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Concept – The ensure the starting capability of the Stationary climate control cools or heats the vehicle, the stationary climate control car's interior prior to departure to a com- may be automatically switched off, for fortable temperature. instance after repeated switching on:

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 219

Climate control CONTROLS

switch the drive-ready state on and off Setting the departure time and the system is available again. Via the Central Information Display (CID): – The vents are open to allow air to flow out. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" Switching on/off directly 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" Concept 4. "Activate comfort climate" The system can be switched on or off di- 5. "Plan comfort climate" rectly. 6. Set the desired departure time, refer to The system switches off automatically after page 259. a certain period of time. Activating the departure time Via the Central Information Display If a departure time is to influence the (CID): switching on of the stationary climate con- The system can be switched on or off via trol, the respective departure time must be the Central Information Display (CID). activated first. Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort climate" 4. "Activate comfort climate" 5. "Activate now" 5. "Plan comfort climate" Climate control at departure time 6. "Precondition for departure" Activate the desired departure time. Concept The symbol on the automatic climate Different departure times can be adjusted to control lights up when the departure time is ensure a comfortable interior temperature activated. in the vehicle at the time of departure. The symbol on the automatic climate The activation time is automatically deter- control flashes when the stationary climate mined based on the temperature. control has been switched on. The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time. The departure time is preselected in two steps: – Set departure times. – Activate departure times.

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 220

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and This chapter describes all standard, country- operation. Also follow the safety informa- specific and optional features offered with tion of the hand-held transmitter. the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country Compatibility versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these If this symbol is printed on the pack- functions and systems, the applicable laws aging or in the owner's manual of the and regulations must be observed. system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control. Integrated Universal Remote If you have any questions, please contact: Control – A dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Concept – www.homelink.com on the Internet. The integrated Universal Remote Control in HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen- the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- tex Corporation. tions of remote-controlled systems, such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys- Overview tems. The integrated Universal Remote Con- trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. 1 LED Safety information 2 Programmable keys 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operating remote-controlled systems, such as the garage door, using the integrated Universal Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 221

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Programming Special feature of the rolling code wireless system General information If you are unable to operate the system af- 1. Switch on the ignition. ter repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a roll- 2. Initial setup: ing code radio system. Press and hold the two outer buttons on Read the system's owner's manual, or press the interior mirror simultaneously for the programmed button on the interior mir- approximately 20 seconds until the LED ror longer. If the LED on the interior mirror on the interior mirror flashes. This starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit erases all programming of the buttons constantly for 2 seconds, the system fea- on the interior mirror. tures a rolling code radio system. Flashing 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the and continuous illumination of the LED will system to be controlled approx. 1 to repeat for approximately 20 seconds. 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the but- For systems with a rolling code radio sys- tons of the interior mirror. The required tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con- distance depends on the hand-held trol and the system also have to be transmitter. synchronized. 4. Simultaneously press and hold the but- Please read the owner's manual to find out ton of the desired function on the hand- how to synchronize the system. held transmitter and the button to be programmed on the interior mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a LED on the interior mirror will begin second person. flashing slowly. Synchronizing the universal remote control 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED with the system: flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- faster indicates that the button on the mote-controlled system. interior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the inte- If the LED does not flash faster after at rior mirror as described. least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior mirror and the 3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- hand-held transmitter and repeat the ton on the system being programmed. step. Several more attempts at different You have approx. 30 seconds for the distances may be necessary. Wait at next step. least 15 seconds between attempts. 4. Hold down the programmed button on Canada: if programming with the hand- the interior mirror for approximately held transmitter was interrupted, hold 3 seconds and then release it. If neces- down the interior mirror button and re- sary, repeat this step up to three times peatedly press and release the hand-held in order to finish synchronization. Once transmitter button for 2 seconds. synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out. 6. To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5. The systems can be controlled using the interior mirror buttons.

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 222

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Reprogramming individual buttons system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety informa- 1. Switch on the ignition. tion of the hand-held transmitter. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed. The system, such as the garage door, can be 3. As soon as the interior mirror LED operated using the button on the interior starts flashing slowly, hold the hand- mirror while the engine is running or when held transmitter for the system to be the ignition is started. To do this, hold down controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to the button within receiving range of the 8 cm away from the buttons of the inte- system until the function is activated. The rior mirror. The required distance de- interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire- pends on the hand-held transmitter. less signal is being transmitted. 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held Deleting stored functions transmitter. Press and hold the two outer buttons on the 5. Release both buttons as soon as the in- interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- terior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. mately 20 seconds until the LED on the in- The LED flashing faster indicates that terior mirror flashes rapidly. All stored func- the button on the interior mirror has tions will be deleted. The functions cannot been programmed. The system can then be deleted individually. be controlled by the button on the interior mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at Digital compass most 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the programming starting Overview with step 4. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. Operation 1 Control button 2 Mirror display WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operating Mirror display remote-controlled systems, such as the ga- The point of the compass is displayed in the rage door, using the integrated Universal mirror when driving straight. Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 223

Interior equipment CONTROLS

Operating concept – 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. Various functions can be called up by press- – 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering ing the control button with a pointed object, setting. such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar – 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how Setting the compass zones long the control button is pressed: Sets the particular compass zones on the ve- – Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. hicle so that the compass operates correctly; – 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure Calibrating the digital compass 1. Press and hold the control button for ap- The digital compass must be calibrated in prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the the event of the following: set compass zone appears in the mirror. – The wrong compass point is displayed. 2. To change the zone setting, press the – The point of the compass displayed does control button quickly and repeatedly not change despite changing the direc- until the number of the compass zone tion of travel. that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror. – Not all points of the compass are displayed. The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 224

CONTROLS Interior equipment

Procedure Ashtray/cigarette lighter 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near Overview the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle. 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 3. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass. The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in Left/right-hand steering the center console. The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory. Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray, remove the Setting the language ashtray from the cup holder. Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the Cigarette lighter control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O". Safety information Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds. WARNING Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can Sun visor cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is Glare shield held against the respective objects. There To provide protection against glare, fold the is a risk of fire and injuries. Take hold of sun visor down or pivot it to the side. the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette Vanity mirror lighter and burn themselves. A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 225

Interior equipment CONTROLS

NOTICE NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of can work with high voltages and currents, damage to property. Replace the cigarette which means that the 12 volt on-board lighter or socket cover again after using network can be overloaded or damaged. the socket. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the Operation engine compartment. Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops NOTICE back out. If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using Sockets the socket.

Concept In the center console The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when the ignition or drive-ready state is switched on. General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using non- compatible connectors. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. Safety information

WARNING Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 226

CONTROLS Interior equipment

In the cargo area In the rear center console

The socket is located on the right side in One USB dual charge socket is located in the cargo area. the rear center console.

Under the center armrest USB interface

Concept Mobile devices with USB port can be connected to the USB interface. General information Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB interface in the section on USB connections, re- The USB interface is located under the cen- fer to page 63. ter armrest. In the front center console

The USB interface is located in the front of the center console.

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 227

Storage compartments CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options – Glove compartment on the front passenger side. This chapter describes all standard, country- – Storage compartment under the driver's specific and optional features offered with seat. the series. It also describes features that are – Compartments in the doors. not necessarily available in your vehicle, – Storage compartment in the center arm- e. g., due to the selected options or country rest. versions. This also applies to safety-related – Storage compartment in front of the cup functions and systems. When using these holders. functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. – Clothes hooks – Storage compartments in the cargo area. – Storage tray in the center console. Safety information – Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

WARNING Loose objects or devices with a cable con- Glove compartment nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's inte- Safety information rior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- WARNING jury. Secure loose objects or devices with Folded open, the glove compartment pro- a cable connection to the vehicle in the trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the car's interior. glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking NOTICE and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can injury. Always close the glove compart- damage the dashboard. There is a risk of ment immediately after using it. damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 228

CONTROLS Storage compartments

Opening breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Center armrest

General information The center armrest contains a storage compartment. Pull the handle. Opening The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Driver's seat

There is a storage compartment under the Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm- driver's seat. rest upward, arrow 2.

Compartments in the doors Set the incline The center armrest can be adjusted in several tilt settings. General information There are storage compartments in the doors. Cup holders

Safety information Safety information

WARNING NOTICE Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or Unsuitable containers in the cup holder glasses, can break in the event of an acci- and hot beverages can damage the cup dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. holder and increase the risk of injury in Broken glass can be scattered in the car's the event of an accident. There is a risk of interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use damage to property. Do not use any break- light-weight, unbreakable, and sealable able objects while driving. Only stow containers. Do not transport hot bever-

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 229

Storage compartments CONTROLS

ages. Do not force objects into the cup Safety information holder. NOTICE Front With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers before the center armrest is folded up.

Clothes hooks

General information In the center console. The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors. Rear Safety information General information The cup holder is located in the center arm- WARNING rest. Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of an accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

WARNING Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. to a risk of objects flying about during To open: press the button. braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a To close: push both covers back in, one after risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- the other. erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 230

CONTROLS Cargo area

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are WARNING not necessarily available in your vehicle, Improperly stowed objects can shift and e. g., due to the selected options or country be thrown into the car's interior, for in- versions. This also applies to safety-related stance in the event of an accident or dur- functions and systems. When using these ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehi- functions and systems, the applicable laws cle occupants can be hit and injured. There and regulations must be observed. is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly. Loading NOTICE Safety information Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo WARNING area. High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving Steps for Determining Correct Load characteristics may be negatively im- Limit pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen- 1. Locate the statement “The combined ing the braking distances and changing weight of occupants and cargo should the steering response. There is a risk of an never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on accident. Pay attention to the permitted your vehicle’s placard. load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. WARNING 3. Subtract the combined weight of the Loose objects or devices with a cable con- driver and passengers from XXX kg or nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile XXX lbs. phones, can be thrown into the car's inte- 4. The resulting figure equals the available rior while driving, for instance in the amount of cargo and luggage load ca- event of an accident or during braking and pacity. For example, if the “XXX” evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will jury. Secure loose objects or devices with be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 231

Cargo area CONTROLS

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400– – Do not stack cargo above the top edge of 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) the backrests. 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- – Small and light cargo: secure with gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- ratchet straps or draw straps. hicle. That weight may not safely exceed – Larger and heavy cargo: secure with the available cargo and luggage load ca- cargo straps. pacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred Lashing eyes in the cargo area to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Load

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo The maximum load is the sum of the weight area. of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Cargo cover

Stowing and securing cargo General information – Cover sharp edges and corners on the When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cargo. cover is raised. – Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom Safety information of the rear passenger seat backrests. – Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is WARNING not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile – If necessary, fold down the rear back- phones, can be thrown into the car's inte- rests to stow large cargo. rior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 232

CONTROLS Cargo area

evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- Multi-function hook jury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior. WARNING Improper use of the multi-function hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about Removing during braking and evasive maneuvers, For storing bulky objects the cargo cover for example. There is a risk of injury and can be removed. risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, such as shopping 1. Detach the left and right retaining bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only straps at the tailgate. transport heavy luggage in the cargo area 2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets if it has been appropriately secured. on the left and right.

The cargo area contains two multi-function Installing hooks. 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon- tally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages. Storage space under cargo 2. Attach the left and right retaining straps floor panel at the tailgate.

Storage compartments in the NOTICE The storage space under the cargo floor cargo area panel is only suitable for soft objects. Hard objects may result in damage to the vehi- Storage compartment on the side cle electrical system in the event of an accident. There is a risk of damage to prop- A storage compartment is located on the left erty. Only stow soft objects under the side. cargo floor panel.

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 233

Cargo area CONTROLS

Enlarging the cargo area injury. Do not fasten any objects to the straps for unlocking the rear backrests. Concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding WARNING down the rear seat backrests or by moving The stability of the child restraint system the rear seat backrest into the cargo posi- is limited or compromised with incorrect tion. seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or General information danger to life. Make sure that the child re- The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio straint system fits securely against the of 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest and the center section can be folded down tilt for all affected backrests and correctly separately. adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and The rear seat backrests can be folded down backrests are securely engaged or locked. from the rear. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them. Safety information

WARNING WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving Danger of jamming with folding down the the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk Make sure that the area of movement is of damage to property. Make sure that the clear when moving the head restraint. area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down. Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear WARNING If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown into the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest folds WARNING forward. Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 234

CONTROLS Cargo area

Cargo position Variable cargo area floor

Concept Concept The rear seat backrests can be moved into With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo an upright loading position individually. An area can be configured corresponding to adjustment in several tilt stages is possible transport requirements. as needed.

Settings General information 1. Pull the strap. Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 230. Removing the cargo floor panel 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat backrest as required. 3. Engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest 2. Grasp the cargo floor panel at the rear 1. Pull the strap. and fold it upward. 3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets. Inserting the cargo floor panel 1. Push the cargo area floor into the supports at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor must engage noticeably.

2. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it.

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 235

Cargo area CONTROLS

2. Fold the cargo area floor over down- Mounting ward. 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward. MINI Picnic Bench

Concept The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfortable seating surface on the loading lip of the vehicle. General information Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the 2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the vehicle is parked and with the tailgate open. front part of the cargo floor panel and at- When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use, tach it to the rear part of the cargo floor fold it together to prevent soiling and dam- panel using the four snaps. age. In vehicles with a no-touch opening and closing tailgate: If the remote control is in the sensor area, the tailgate can be opened or closed inad- vertently by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot movement. The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehicle. 3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench toward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is Safety information fastened with magnets.

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Overview The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un- 4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor derside of the cargo area floor. downward. To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, proceed in reverse order.

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 236

CONTROLS Cargo area

Folding down The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the underside of the cargo area floor and is fas- 1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor. tened there with magnets.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the middle and pull it back and up against the force of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward and place the MINI Picnic Bench over the loading lip of the cargo area. Place a protective cloth over the bumper.

Folding up Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 237

Cargo area CONTROLS

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving ...... 240 Saving fuel ...... 245

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 240

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle drive This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km the series. It also describes features that are Do not exceed the maximum engine and not necessarily available in your vehicle, road speed: e. g., due to the selected options or country – For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and versions. This also applies to safety-related 100 mph/160 km/h. functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir- and regulations must be observed. cumstances. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km Breaking-in period The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. General information Tires Moving parts need to begin working to- Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- gether smoothly. turing circumstances when tires are brand- The following instructions will help you to new; they achieve their full traction poten- achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- tial after a break-in time. ciency. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Safety information Brake system WARNING Brake discs and brake pads only reach their Due to new parts and components, safety full effectiveness after ap- and driver assistance systems can react prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. during this break-in period. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- Following part replacement vene early if necessary. Observe the break- The same break-in procedures should be ob- in procedures of the respective parts and served if any of the components above-men- components. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 241

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

General driving notes driving operation, idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system. Closing the tailgate Mobile communication devices in Safety information the vehicle

WARNING WARNING An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi- Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can cle and can endanger occupants and other influence one another. There is radiation traffic participants or damage the vehicle due to the transmission operations of mo- in the event of an accident, braking or eva- bile phones. There is a risk of injury or sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust risk of damage to property. If possible, in fumes may enter the car's interior. There the car's interior use only mobile phones is a risk of injury or risk of damage to with direct connections to an exterior an- property. Do not drive with the tailgate tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer- open. ence and deflect the radiation from the car's interior. Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be Hydroplaning avoided: On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water – Close all windows and the glass sunroof. can form between the tires and road sur- – Greatly increase the air flow from the face. vents. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- – Drive moderately. planing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires Hot exhaust gas system and the road surface, ultimately undermin- ing your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. WARNING During driving operation, high tempera- Driving through water tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance caused by the exhaust General information gas system. If combustible materials, such When driving through water, follow the fol- as leaves or grass, come in contact with lowing: hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of in- – Drive through calm water only. jury or risk of damage to property. Do not – Drive through water only if it is not remove the heat shields installed and deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. never apply undercoating to them. Make – Drive through water no faster than sure that no combustible materials can walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. come in contact with hot vehicle parts in

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 242

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Safety information securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning. NOTICE When driving too quickly through too Driving in wet conditions deep water, water can enter into the en- When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy gine compartment, the electrical system or rain, gently press the brake pedal every few the transmission. There is a risk of damage miles. to property. When driving through water, Ensure that this action does not endanger do not exceed the maximum indicated wa- other traffic. ter level and the maximum speed for driving through water. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Braking safely In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. General information The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a Hills standard feature. Perform an emergency stop in situations General information that require such. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in Steering is still responsive. You can still the gear that requires least braking effort. avoid any obstacles with a minimum of Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re- steering effort. duce brake efficiency. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds You can increase the engine's braking effect from the hydraulic circuits indicate that by shifting down, going all the way to first ABS is in its active mode. gear, if needed.

Objects in the area around the pedals Safety information

WARNING WARNING Light but consistent brake pressure can Objects in the driver's floor area can limit lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing the pedal distance or block a depressed out and possibly even brake failure. There pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow is a risk of an accident. Avoid placing ex- objects in the vehicle such that they are cessive stress on the brake system. secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats WARNING and do not layer several floor mats. Make In idle state, in GREEN Mode or with sure that there is sufficient clearance for drive-ready state switched off, safety-rele- the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are vant functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking force boost, and steering assistance, are restricted or not

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 243

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

available at all. There is a risk of an acci- Roof-mounted luggage rack dent. Do not drive in idle state, in GREEN Mode or with drive-ready state switched off. General information Installation only possible with roof rack. Brake disc corrosion Roof racks are available as special accessories. Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- nation on the brake pads are increased by Securing the following circumstances: Follow the installation instructions of the – Low mileage. roof rack. – Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. Loading – Infrequent use of the brakes. Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise – Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, agents. they have a major effect on vehicle handling Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will and steering response. cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in Therefore, note the following when loading their response - generally this cannot be and driving: corrected. – Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle Condensation water under the weight. parked vehicle – Be sure that adequate clearance is main- When using the automatic climate control, tained for tilting and opening the glass condensation water develops and collects sunroof. underneath the vehicle. – Distribute the roof load uniformly. – The roof load should not extend past the Ground clearance loading area. – Always place the heaviest pieces on the NOTICE bottom. If ground clearance is insufficient, there – Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in- might be contact with the front or rear stance using ratchet straps. spoiler, for instance when driving over – Do not let objects project into the open- curbs or entering into underground vehi- ing path of the tailgate. cle parking garages. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is suffi- – Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac- cient ground clearance available. celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 244

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

Driving on poor roads After a trip on poor roads Note the following to maintain driving Concept safety: Because of its greater ground clearance, the – Clear heavy soiling from the body. vehicle can be driven on a variety of road – Keep the wheels and tires free of mud, types and qualities. snow, ice, etc., and check them for damage. Safety information Driving on racetracks NOTICE Objects in unpaved areas, for instance Higher mechanical and thermal loads during stones or branches, can damage the vehi- racetrack operation lead to increased wear. cle. There is a risk of damage to property. This wear is not covered by the warranty. Do not drive on unpaved terrain. The vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports competition. When driving on poor roads For your own safety, for the safety of passengers and of the vehicle, heed the following points: – Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. – Do not take risks when driving. – Adjust the speed to the road surface conditions. The steeper and more uneven the road surface, the slower the speed. – When driving on steep uphill or downhill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near the MAX mark. – Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in contact with the ground. The ground clearance may vary depending on the vehicle load. – When wheels continue to spin, depress the accelerator so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driving force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Control if available.

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 245

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and options Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, Close the windows and glass e. g., due to the selected options or country sunroof versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these Driving with the glass sunroof and windows functions and systems, the applicable laws open results in increased air resistance and and regulations must be observed. raises fuel consumption.

General information Tires

The vehicle contains advanced technologies General information for the reduction of fuel consumption and emission values. Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence Fuel consumption depends on a number of fuel consumption. different factors. The implementation of certain measures, Check the tire inflation pressure driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environ- regularly mental impact. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Remove unnecessary cargo Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption Additional weight increases fuel consump- and tire wear. tion. Drive away without delay Remove attached parts follow- Do not wait for the engine to warm-up ing use while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which speeds. are no longer required following use. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 246

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

Look well ahead when driving Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 292. Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption. Using the hybrid system effi- Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. ciently By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Concept The vehicle's hybrid system runs automatically. Through foresighted driving, the hy- Avoid high engine speeds brid properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel consumption and energy recovery are opti- Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel mized. consumption and reduces wear. Optimizing energy recovery Switch off the engine during Types of energy recovery longer stops Energy recovery is used to charge the high- voltage battery. Energy recovery is important for the supply of electrical components Switch off the engine during longer stops, and thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency. for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross- Energy recovery appears in three stages ings or in traffic congestion. during coasting and braking: – Low energy recovery: while coasting to Switch off any functions that a halt without stepping on the brake. – Average energy recovery: while deceler- are not currently needed ating slightly by gently pressing the brake pedal. Functions such as seat heating and the rear – Maximum energy recovery: when press- window defroster require a lot of energy ing the brake pedal somewhat more and consume additional fuel, especially in firmly provided that the pointer remains city and stop-and-go traffic. in the middle area of the CHARGE indi- Switch off these functions if they are not cator in the instrument cluster, refer to needed. page 140.

Optimum energy recovery Have maintenance carried out Foresighted driving and decelerating helps with optimizing energy recovery. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to As soon as the display shows the maximum achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv- energy recovery, only press the brake pedal ice life. MINI recommends that mainte- harder if required by the situation. nance work be performed by a MINI service center.

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 247

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

Exemplary traffic situations for fuel the road is analyzed. Hybrid operation efficiency adapts to the specific route sections. In many driving situations, the hybrid sys- The function may be restricted if the navi- tem allows for a particularly efficient en- gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- ergy management. able, for example. – Stop-and-go traffic: The combustion engine is switched on or over automatically by the hybrid sys- GREEN Mode tem. – Driving with constant speed: Concept The electric motor relieves the combus- GREEN Mode supports a driving style that tion engine periodically by also being saves on fuel consumption. For this pur- switched on. pose, the engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control out- Optimizing fuel consumption put, are adjusted. Under certain conditions the engine is auto- Charging the vehicle regularly matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position and the en- Charge the vehicle regularly and completely gine is switched off. The D selector lever using a suitable charging device. This will position remains engaged. reduce fuel consumption due to the use of electrical energy. In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized Longer idle periods, refer to page 316, can fuel consumption driving style. reduce the charge state of the high-voltage battery. Activating GREEN Mode Avoiding the use of the combustion Press the MINI Driving Modes engine switch downward until Follow the following information to avoid GREEN is displayed in the in- using the combustion engine: strument cluster. – Set the characteristics of the hybrid system to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 121. Configuring GREEN – Follow the indicators in the instrument cluster regarding electric driving, refer Via MINI Driving Modes switch to page 140. 1. Activating GREEN Mode. Using the navigation system regularly 2. "Configure GREEN" Use the navigation system also for familiar 3. Select the desired setting. and regularly traveled routes. When the navigation system destination guidance is active, the hybrid system uses the existing navigation data. The upcoming course of

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 248

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

Via the Central Information Display Indications on the Control Display (CID) 1. "My MINI" GREEN tip, driving instruction 2. "Vehicle settings" The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, 3. "Configure GREEN" for example by backing off the accelerator. 4. Select the desired setting. Open GREEN Tip display Activating/deactivating the functions Via the Central Information Display (CID): The following functions can be activated/ 1. "My MINI" deactivated: – "GREEN speed warning": 2. "Technology in action" – "GREEN climate control" 3. "GREEN tips" Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. GREEN tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions GREEN Limit are displayed. – Activate the GREEN Limit: Symbol Measure "GREEN speed warning": For an efficient driving style, A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of look well ahead when driving, the set GREEN Limit is exceeded. accelerate conservatively, and – Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit: delay accelerating. "Tip at:" Reduce speed to the selected Select the desired speed. GREEN speed.

GREEN climate control Steptronic transmission: Climate control is set to be efficient. Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions. By making a slight change to the set temperature, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized. The power output to the seat heater and exterior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 249

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 MOBILITY

Charging the vehicle ...... 252 Refueling ...... 261 Fuel ...... 264 Wheels and tires ...... 266 Engine compartment ...... 283 Engine oil ...... 286 Coolant ...... 290 Maintenance ...... 292 Replacing components ...... 294 Breakdown assistance ...... 305 Care ...... 312

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 252

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket with a voltage of 120 volts. This chapter describes all standard, country- For optimal use of the energy from the specific and optional features offered with power mains, charging at a charging sta- the series. It also describes features that are tion, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recom- not necessarily available in your vehicle, mended. e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Charge current functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws General information and regulations must be observed. The charge current strength is indicated in amperes. The vehicle cannot automatically detect the Concept maximum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging The vehicle can be charged using various via a household socket or charging station. charging cables at charging stations or household sockets. Control and monitoring Level 1 charging of the charging process are handled com- Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your pletely automatically. The charge current own household socket, as well as when strength can be set via the Central Informa- charging at external electrical power sock- tion Display (CID). ets in Level 1, the allowed charge current strength must be determined, for instance by a qualified electrician. General information The charge current strength for Level 1 charging, refer to page 258, can be High-voltage battery adjusted in the vehicle in three levels. The high-voltage battery is used as an en- At delivery, the charge current for ergy accumulator. The high-voltage battery Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level. can be charged by energy recovery during Depending on the country-specific version, the trip or via the power grid. one of several ampere ratings is printed on In order to operate the high-voltage battery the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rat- optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and ing is the limit which must be adhered to completely on a compatible charger. for the vehicle if the charge current is set to When charging via the power grid, you can the highest level. Depending on the charg- chose between the following variants. ing cable, the charge current strength may vary when lower levels are set. – Level 1 charging via a household socket. – Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging station.

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 253

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting "Max." "Reduced" "Low" 8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A 10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A 12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A 15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Depending on the charge current setting, The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- the charging duration changes. mends that, prior to your first use of a charging location, you have the compati- Maintaining charge state bility of the following components con- Should it be necessary, for instance to confirmed: serve the electric range for a later point in – Charging cable. time on the trip, the current charge state of – Charging station. the high-voltage battery can be maintained – Household socket and connected cir- or increased with SAVE BATTERY, refer to cuits. page 121.

WARNING Safety information Damaged or worn charging devices, for instance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices WARNING in proper state. Improper working with electrical current can lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or high currents. There is a risk WARNING of fire or danger to life. Observe the gen- If a sufficient safety distance from easily eral safety regulations when working with flammable materials is not maintained, si- electrical current. multaneous charging and filling with fuel can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do WARNING not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it A faulty and incorrectly designed charging simultaneously. device at the charging location can cause damage to the vehicle and overload the power mains at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 254

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca- WARNING bles or adapters. Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is applied at the charging connection. There is a risk WARNING of injury or danger to life. Damaged charging cables can heat up or The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of mends that work on the charging connec- fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged tion, for instance cleaning, be performed charging cables only. by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Level 1 charging cable The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging cable. Charging cable With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissible to perform charging from grounded General information household sockets. At the power connection Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charg- of a household socket, charging is done ing cable or the permanently installed with alternating current. charging cable of a charging station to When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this charge the vehicle. may produce efficiency values other than Different charging cables can be required indicated on the energy label. depending on the country. Level 2 charging cable Safety information The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to quickly recharge at sockets of designated Level 2 charging stations using a spe- WARNING cial plug. Charging is performed with Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit- alternating current at designated able charging stations can heat up and Level 2 charging stations. The charging cause damage to the vehicle. There is a process can be completed faster than at risk of fire. Use charging cables or charg- household sockets. ing stations for charging that are suitable A charging current strength of up to maxi- for the respective vehicle type. mum 16 A is possible. A dealer's service center will be glad to If necessary, the charging cable is attached provide information about suitable charg- to the charging station. ing cables.

WARNING Improper use of the charging cable can prevent charging and lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging cable only for charging

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 255

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

Storage lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed. 1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.

The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in the cargo area. Store charging cable again in the bag after 2. Remove cover of the charging cable use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet. plug, if needed. If required, store the charging cable with 3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the the installed plug cover to prevent moisture household socket or Level 2 charging in the charging cable plug. cable to the port on the charging station. 4. Insert the charging cable plug corre- Connecting sponding to the charging socket, and push it in until it engages. Charging socket flap Removing When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable. If necessary, clean the area between charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it. 1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is locked. The charging socket flap is located on the Charging cable is unlocked. left side of the vehicle. 2. Press the release button on the handle, Always keep charging socket clean and un- arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at obstructed. the gripping areas. Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 256

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Charging process is interrupted. Charging cable is manually unlocked.

3. Remove the charging cable from the 3. Removing the charging cable, refer to charging socket, arrow 2. page 255. 4. Put the charging socket lid back on. Have the locking system of the charging 5. Close the charging socket flap. socket checked at the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re- 6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, pair shop after emergency unlocking of the if needed. charging cable. 7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charging cable from the port on the charging Charging process station as needed. 8. Stow the charging cable. General information At a charging station, insert the perma- At high temperatures, the high-voltage bat- nently installed charging cable in the tery is initially cooled. There may be a delay place provided for it. before charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is discharged, cooling of the high- voltage battery may not be possible. The Emergency unlocking charging process cannot be started. If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to The charging cable is locked when the vehi- high temperatures and direct sunlight, this cle is locked and during the charging proc- may interrupt the charging process. Charg- ess. ing resumes automatically. In case of an electrical malfunction, the The charging process may take longer under charging cable can be manually unlocked. extremely low or high temperatures. 1. Open the hood. Safety information 2. Pull the knob. WARNING Improper use of the power mains connection can lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use the charging ca-

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 257

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

ble only for charging the vehicle, and do Display of the charging status not extend it using cables or adapters. Indicator light at the charging socket

WARNING If the charge current strength is adjusted incorrectly, the power mains of the household socket can be overloaded and overheat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current strength to the power mains prior to charging on household sockets. With unknown power networks, set on the lowest level. An indicator light is located on the charging socket. Starting the charging process 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the Charging status parking brake, if needed. 2. Planning the charging process, refer to Light Charging status page 258. White Charging cable can be con- 3. Switch off drive-ready state. nected or removed. 4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the Flashes or- Charging process is being household socket or Level 2 charging ange prepared. cable to the port on the charging station. Yellow The charging process 5. Open charging socket flap. starts at the set time. 6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, Flashes yel- Charging process is active. refer to page 255. low 7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. Flashes red Fault in the charging proc- rapidly ess. Green Charging process is completed.

When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light goes out after some time. When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow indicator light flashes continuously. The other indicator lights go out after some time. Press the button of the remote control to check the charging status. The charging

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 258

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

status is indicated on the indicator light. In ity rate can be set via the Central Informa- some cases the vehicle is locked. tion Display (CID). Additional messages about the charging sta- Via the Central Information Display (CID): tus, for instance the probable end of charging or the planned departure time, can be 1. "My MINI" shown in the instrument cluster or on the 2. "Plan charging/climate control" Control Display. 3. "Charge for departure time" Planning the charging process 4. "Set low cost time slot" 5. Set rate begin. General information 6. Set rate end. The charging process can be adapted to The vehicle can also start the charging proc- constraints, for instance the cost of electric- ess before the selected time window begins ity. The vehicle can control the charging or end it after the selected time window fin- process in such a way that the charging ishes. The starting point of the charging process is completed at the departure time. process is adjusted so the vehicle can be A departure time must be set for this pur- fully charged and, if applicable, its climate pose, refer to page 259. controlled right up to the departure time. The following settings are available: – Immediate charging. Setting the charge current for – Set time window for favorable charging. charging via a Level 1 charging cable – Set the charge current for charging via a Depending on the electrical mains, the vehi- Level 1 charging cable. cle must be charged with a different charging current strength, refer to page 252. If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Via the Central Information Display (CID): Display (CID). Settings for stationary cli- 1. "My MINI" mate control and charging process are also 2. "Plan charging/climate control" accepted for planned departure times. 3. "Settings charging current" Immediate charging Settings are stored. When you change The charging process starts as soon as the charging locations you also might need to charging cable is connected. change the setting for charging. Via the Central Information Display (CID): Set the charge current strength at other household sockets to the lowest level. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" Stopping the charging process 3. "Charge immediately" The charging process can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and Setting time window for favorable continued at a later time by connecting the charging charging cable. This enables, for instance the use of other loads on the power connec- When a departure time is set, a time win- tion or prevents simultaneous high power dow for charging with a favorable electric- from multiple loads.

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 259

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

Removing the charging cable, refer to Display Meaning page 255. Ring flashes orange: the charg- Continuing the charging process ing process is being prepared. If the charging process is interrupted, for Ring yellow: the charging proc- instance through a temporary power failure, ess starts at the set time. the charging process is automatically con- Ring flashes yellow: the charg- tinued after the interruption. ing process is active. Ring flashes red rapidly: fault in Terminating the charging process the charging process. 1. Remove the charging cable from the ve- Ring green: the charging proc- hicle, refer to page 255. ess is completed. 2. Stow the charging cable as required. End of charging time or set de- 3. Close the charging socket flap. parture time. 4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. Departure time set.

Displays in the instrument Climate control activated at de- cluster parture time. Flashing: ventilation active. The charge state indicator light, refer to page 152, shows the charge state of the high-voltage battery in the instrument clus- Flashing: heating active. ter, if the ignition or drive-ready state is switched on. If all bars are filled, the high- voltage battery is fully charged. Flashing: cooling active. Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage. Information regarding the charging process are shown on the charging screen. Departure time

Concept For optimum range and climate control, the departure time can be set before parking the vehicle. General information With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre-heated or pre-cooled during the charging process if climate control is set. Climate

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 260

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

control output is reduced during the trip. The set departure time will be deactivated, This increases the range during electric if the departure time was ignored three driving. times in a row. The following settings are possible at departure time: – Climate control at departure time. Climate control – Planning of up to two regular departure times. The following settings for climate control of the vehicle are possible: If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information – Activate stationary climate control im- Display (CID). Settings for climate control mediately, refer to page 218. and charging process are also applied for With stationary climate control acti- scheduled departure times. vated and no charging cable connected, the range is reduced. Climate control at departure time – Planned climate control at the set depar- Via the Central Information Display (CID): ture time, refer to page 219. If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the 1. "My MINI" high-voltage battery may not be fully 2. "Plan charging/climate control" charged at departure time. 3. "Precondition for departure"

Setting the departure time Discharged high-voltage and Via the Central Information Display (CID): vehicle battery 1. "My MINI" General information 2. "Plan charging/climate control" In addition to the high-voltage battery, the 3. "Set departure time" vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which 4. Set the desired time. is required for operation of the onboard Up to two departure times can be set. electronics. If the high-voltage battery is discharged and Activating the departure time the combustion engine is started, air conditioning may be limited. Via the Central Information Display (CID): With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper- 1. "My MINI" ation of the vehicle is possible. 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Set departure time" Starting the vehicle Set departure times are displayed. If the vehicle battery is discharged, the combustion engine can be started using the 4. For example activate "Departure time 1". battery of another vehicle and two jumper Up to two departure times can be activated. cables, see Jump-starting, refer to page 307.

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 261

Refueling MOBILITY

Refueling

Vehicle features and options not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it simultaneously. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are Tank vent not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Concept functions and systems. When using these The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel functions and systems, the applicable laws tank. The fuel tank is designed for special and regulations must be observed. requirements that arise from hybrid operation of the vehicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion engine or electric motor. General information General information Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build page 264, prior to refueling. up due to gasoline vapors which are dissi- To also ensure all engine functions under pated before the fuel cap is opened. unfavorable conditions, for instance steep vehicle inclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 li- Overview ters fuel should be refueled. The switch is located in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Safety information Tank venting 1. Switch off drive-ready state.

NOTICE 2. Pull the switch to start the pres- With a driving range of less than sure equalization. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are The status of the tank venting is dis- not ensured anymore. There is a risk of played in the instrument cluster. In rare damage to property. Refuel promptly. cases, the tank venting can last several minutes. If the tank venting has been completed, WARNING a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for If a sufficient safety distance from easily opening. flammable materials is not maintained, simultaneous charging and filling with fuel 3. Open the fuel filler flap. can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 262

MOBILITY Refueling

If it is not possible to open the fuel filler 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at- flap after tank venting, pull the switch tached to the fuel filler flap. again. If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler flap even after the switch has been pulled, unlock the fuel filler flap manually, refer to page 262.

Fuel cap

Opening Before opening, vent the tank, refer to Closing page 261. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel WARNING filler flap. The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Manually unlocking fuel filler flap E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction. The release is located in the cargo area. 1. Remove the cover.

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 263

Refueling MOBILITY

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap. simultaneously.

NOTICE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling. 3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. Fuel filler flap is opened.

Follow the following when refueling

General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: – Premature switching off. – Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station. Safety informationSafety information

WARNING If a sufficient safety distance from easily flammable materials is not maintained, simultaneous charging and filling with fuel can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 264

MOBILITY Fuel

Fuel

Vehicle features and options Safety information

This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTICE specific and optional features offered with Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or the series. It also describes features that are wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel not necessarily available in your vehicle, system and engine. Furthermore, the cata- e. g., due to the selected options or country lytic converter is permanently damaged. versions. This also applies to safety-related There is a risk of damage to property. Do functions and systems. When using these not refuel or add the following in the case functions and systems, the applicable laws of gasoline engines: and regulations must be observed. – Leaded gasoline. – Metallic additives, for instance man- Fuel recommendation ganese or iron. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a General information dealer’s service center or another qualified Depending on the region, many gas stations service center or repair shop. sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold NOTICE start easier. Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system Gasoline and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. General information Do not refuel with fuels containing metha- For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline nol, e.g. M5 to M100. should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as NOTICE containing metal must not be used. Fuel that does not comply with the mini- Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of mum quality can compromise engine func- 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu- tion or cause engine damage. There is a eling. risk of damage to property. Do not fill with Ethanol should meet the following quality fuel that does not comply with the mini- standards: mum quality. US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 265

Fuel MOBILITY

CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi- tionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high alti- tude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unsched- uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 266

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire inflation pressure specifications This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with In the tire inflation pressure table the series. It also describes features that are The tire inflation pressure table, refer to not necessarily available in your vehicle, page 267, contains all tire inflation pres- e. g., due to the selected options or country sure specifications for the specified tire versions. This also applies to safety-related sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire functions and systems. When using these inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes functions and systems, the applicable laws approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle and regulations must be observed. for the vehicle type. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire inflation pressure – Tire sizes of your vehicle. – Maximum permitted driving speed. General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation Checking the tire inflation pressure pressure influence the following: – The service life of the tires. General information – Road safety. Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla- – Driving comfort. tion pressure increases with the tire temperature. – Fuel consumption. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire Safety information inflation pressure. The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi. WARNING A tire with too little or no tire inflation Checking using tire inflation pressure pressure may heat up significantly and specifications in the tire inflation sustain damage. This will have a negative pressure table impact on aspects of handling, such as The tire inflation pressure specifications in steering and braking response. There is a the tire inflation pressure table only relate risk of an accident. Regularly check the to cold tires or tires at the same tempera- tire inflation pressure, and correct it as ture as the ambient temperature. needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: – Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 267

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

– If the vehicle has not moved again for at Tire inflation pressure values up to least 2 hours after a trip. 100 mph/160 km/h 1. Determine, refer to page 266, the intended tire inflation pressure levels for COOPER SE the mounted tires. 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all Tire size Pressure specifications four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex- in bar/PSI ample. Specifications 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the in bar/PSI with current tire inflation pressure value de- cold tires viates from the specified value. 4. Check whether all valve caps are 225/55 R 17 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 screwed onto the tire valves. 97 H M+S Std/RSC After correcting the tire inflation pressure 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 95 W RSC For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. 225/50 R 18 For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset 95 H M+S RSC the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 225/50 R 18 Tire inflation pressures up to 95 V M+S A/S 100 mph/160 km/h Std/RSC For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pres- Tire inflation pressures at max. sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta- speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h ble, refer to page 267, and adjust as necessary. WARNING In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/ 160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for These pressure values can also be found on optimum driving comfort, note the pressure the tire inflation pressure label on the driv- values in the tire inflation pressure table, er's door pillar. refer to page 268, and adjust as necessary. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 268

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure values over driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by 100 mph/160 km/h 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – COOPER SE GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Speed letter Specifications Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h in bar/PSI with R = 106 mph/170 km/h cold tires S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h 225/55 R 17 2.3 / 33 2.7 / 39 H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h 97 H M+S V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h Std/RSC W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h 225/50 R 18 2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42 Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h 95 W RSC 225/50 R 18 Tire Identification Number 95 H M+S RSC DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2118 225/50 R 18 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand 95 V M+S A/S Std/RSC xxx: tire size and tire design 2118: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines Tire identification marks of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Tire age Tire size 205/45 R 17 84 V Recommendation 205: nominal width in mm Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at 45: aspect ratio in % least every 6 years. R: radial tire code Manufacture date 17: rim diameter in inches You can find the manufacture date of the 84: load rating, not for ZR tires tire on the tire's sidewall. V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Designation Manufacture date Maximum tire load DOT … 2118 21st week 2018 Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Locate the maximum tire load on the tire Quality grades can be found where applica- sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating ble on the tire sidewall between tread – GAWR – on the certification label on the shoulder and maximum section width.

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 269

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- Temperature ture A The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance DOT Quality Grades to the generation of heat and its ability to Treadwear dissipate heat when tested under controlled Traction AA A B C conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can Temperature A B C cause the material of the tire to degenerate All passenger vehicle tires must conform to and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- Federal Safety Requirements in addition to ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The these grades. grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must Treadwear meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A based on the wear rate of the tire when represent higher levels of performance on tested under controlled conditions on a the laboratory test wheel than the minimum specified government test course. E.g., a required by law. tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half, 1 g, times as well on the government WARNING course as a tire graded 100. The relative The temperature grade for this tire is es- performance of tires depends upon the ac- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated tual conditions of their use, however, and and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- may depart significantly from the norm due derinflation, or excessive loading, either to variations in driving habits, service prac- separately or in combination, can cause tices and differences in road characteristics heat buildup and possible tire failure. and climate.

Traction RSC – Run-flat tires The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are labeled are AA, A, B, and C. with a circular symbol containing the let- Those grades represent the tire's ability to ters RSC marked on the sidewall. stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern- M+S ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. Winter and all-season tires with better cold A tire marked C may have poor traction per- weather performance than summer tires. formance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction Tire tread tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning.

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 270

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Winter tires – Unusual vibrations. Do not drive with a tire tread of less than – Unusual tire or running noises. 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable – Unusual handling such as a strong ten- for winter operation. dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following sit- Minimum tread depth uations, for instance: – Driving over curbs. – Road damage. – Tire inflation pressure too low. – Vehicle overloading. – Incorrect tire storage. Safety information

Wear indicators are distributed around the WARNING tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in- Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres- ches/1.6 mm. sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire The positions of the wear indicators are damage is suspected while driving, imme- marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread diately reduce speed and stop. Have Wear Indicator. wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s service center or another qualified service Tire damage center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced. General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread WARNING wear. Tires can become damaged by driving over Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller cles can cause serious damage to wheels, tire cross-section. The smaller the tire tires and suspension parts. This is more cross-section, the higher the risk of tire likely to occur with low-profile tires, which damage. There is a danger of accidents and provide less cushioning between the wheel property damage. If possible, drive around and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- obstacles, or drive over them slowly and ards and reduce your speed, especially if carefully. your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 271

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Changing wheels and tires for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as Mounting and wheel balancing possible. Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Recommended tire brands Wheel and tire combination

General information You can ask the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. WARNING The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with New tires the body due to tolerances despite the Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- same official size rating. There is a risk of turing circumstances when tires are brand- an accident. The manufacturer of your ve- new; they achieve their full traction poten- hicle strongly suggests that you use tial after a break-in time. wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for Drive conservatively for the first your vehicle type. 200 miles/300 km. Retreaded tires WARNING Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will WARNING have a negative impact on the vehicle's Retreaded tires can have different tire cas- handling and on the function of a variety ing structures. With advanced age the of systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake service life can be limited. There is a risk System or Dynamic Stability Control. of an accident. The manufacturer of your There is a risk of an accident. To maintain vehicle does not recommend the use of re- good handling and vehicle response, use treaded tires. only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufac- The manufacturer of your vehicle does not turer of the vehicle recommends that you recommend the use of retreaded tires. use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 272

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Winter tires Storage Winter tires are recommended for operat- Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and ing on winter roads. dark place. Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro- Always protect tires against all contact with vide better winter traction than summer oil, grease, and solvents. tires, they usually do not provide the same Do not leave tires in plastic bags. level of performance as winter tires. Remove dirt from wheels or tires. Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is Run-flat tires higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of Concept view. The label is available from a dealer’s Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- service center or another qualified service der restricted conditions even in the event center or repair shop. of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure. With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed. General information The wheels are composed of tires that are Changing runflat tires self-supporting to a limited degree. For your own safety, use only runflat tires. The support of the sidewall allows the tire No spare tire is available in the case of a flat to remain drivable to a restricted degree in tire. Further information is available from a the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. dealer’s service center or another qualified Follow the instructions for continued driv- service center or repair shop. ing with a flat tire. Rotating wheels between axles Safety information Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated WARNING in pairs between the axles to achieve even Your vehicle handles differently with a wear. Further information is available from run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; a dealer’s service center or another quali- for instance, your lane stability when fied service center or repair shop. After ro- braking is reduced, braking distances are tating, check the tire pressure and correct, longer and the self-steering properties will if needed. change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a Storing tires speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Air pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 273

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

Label General information – Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container. – Use of the Mobility System may be inef- fective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more. – Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. The tires are marked on the tire sidewall – If possible, do not remove foreign bodies with RSC Run-flat System Component. that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire. Repairing a flat tire – Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. Safety measures – The use of a sealant can damage the – Park the vehicle as far away as possible TPM wheel electronics. In this case, from passing traffic and on solid ground. have the TPM wheel electronics re- – Switch on the hazard warning system. placed at the next opportunity. – Secure the vehicle against rolling away – The compressor can be used to check by setting the parking brake. the tire inflation pressure. – Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- Overview tion and engage the steering wheel lock. – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the Storage vehicle and ensure that they remain out- The Mobility System is located in a bag on side the immediate area in a safe place, the right side trim in the cargo area. such as behind a guardrail. – If necessary, set up a warning triangle Sealant container at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the dam- – Sealant container, arrow 1. age from the inside. – Filling hose, arrow 2.

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 274

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Observe use-by date on the sealant con- Filling the tire with sealant tainer. Safety information Compressor DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color- less and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation. 1 Sealant container unlocking 2 Sealant container holder 3 Tire pressure gage NOTICE 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button The compressor can overheat during ex- 5 On/off switch tended operation. There is a risk of dam- 6 Compressor age to property. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes. 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose Filling Safety measures 1. Shake the sealant container. – Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. – Switch on the hazard warning system. – Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake. – Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. – If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 275

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the 5. With the compressor switched off, in- cover of the sealant container. Do not sert the plug into the power socket in- kink the hose. side the vehicle.

3. Slide the sealant container into the 6. With the ignition switched on or the en- holder on the compressor housing, engine running, switch on the compressor. suring that it engages audibly.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tainer onto the tire valve of the non- tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. working wheel. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point. Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 276

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

Removing and stowing the sealant If a tire inflation pressure of at least container 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s service center or another quali- 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant fied service center or repair shop. container from the tire valve. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2. Press the red unlocking device. 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla- 3. Remove the sealant container from the tion pressure is reached. compressor. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in compressor from the tire valve. suitable material to avoid dirtying the 7. Pull the connector out of the power cargo area. socket inside the vehicle. Minimum tire inflation pressure is not 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. reached Minimum tire inflation pressure is 1. Pull the connector out of the power reached socket inside the vehicle. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to compressor from the tire valve. distribute the sealant in the tire. 2. Pull the connector out of the power 3. Screw the connection hose of the com- socket inside the vehicle. pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

4. Insert the connector into the power Adjustment socket inside the vehicle. 1. Stop at a suitable location. 2. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

5. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 277

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

3. Insert the connector into the power ble for operation on the vehicle. Mounting socket inside the vehicle. of snow chains on these wheels and tires is not permitted. Safety information

WARNING With the mounting of snow chains on unsuitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop- 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at erty. Do not mount snow chains. least 2.0 bar. – Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the com- Changing wheels/tires pressor. – Reduce tire inflation pressure: press General information the button on the compressor. When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the wheel does not always need to be changed compressor from the tire valve. immediately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire. 6. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle. If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer’s 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible Safety information speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to DANGER page 176. The vehicle jack is only provided for short- Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to term lifting of the vehicle for wheel page 171. changes. Even if all safety measures are Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- container of the Mobility System promptly. cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Snow chains vehicle and do not start the engine.

General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined certain wheels and tires to be suita-

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 278

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

DANGER WARNING Supports such as wooden blocks under the If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve- jacking point provided for this purpose, hicle jack to bear weight. They have the the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle potential to exert too much strain on the jack may slip when it is being cranked up. vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the There is a risk of injury or risk of damage vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or to property. When cranking up the vehicle danger to life. Do not place supports under jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jack- the vehicle jack. ing point next to the wheel housing.

WARNING WARNING The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac- A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack turer, is provided in order to perform a may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are wheel change in the event of a breakdown. exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and The jack is not designed for frequent use; risk of damage to property. While the ve- for example, changing from summer to hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces winter tires. Using the jack frequently may on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi- cause it to become jammed or damaged. cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal- There is a risk of injury and risk of damage er’s service center or another qualified to property. Only use the jack to attach an service center or repair shop. emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown. Securing the vehicle against rolling

WARNING General information On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack additionally secure the vehicle against roll- can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If ing away when changing a wheel. possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

WARNING The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 279

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

On a level surface

– Lug bolt, arrow 1. Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects – Adapter, arrow 2. in front and behind the wheel that is diago- nal to the wheel to be changed. Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. On a slight downhill gradient 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt. 2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm. If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after able objects, for instance a rock, under the screwing on the lug bolt. wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction. Preparing the vehicle – Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip Lug bolt lock ground at a safe distance from traffic. – Switch on the hazard warning system. Concept – Set the parking brake. The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. – Engage a gear or move the selector lever The lug bolts can only be released with the to position P. adapter which matches the coding. – As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the Overview vehicle and ensure that they remain out- The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in side the immediate area in a safe place, the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to such as behind a guardrail. page 294.

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 280

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

– Depending on the vehicle equipment, Jacking up the vehicle get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. WARNING – If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an Hands and fingers can be jammed when appropriate distance. using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand – Secure the vehicle additionally against position and do not change this position rolling. while using the vehicle jack. – Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar- Jacking points for the vehicle jack row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions. 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan- gular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 281

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the raised a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise. the ground. Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle a crosswise pattern until hand-tight. jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under If non-original light-alloy wheels of the load and continue turning the vehicle vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the jack crank or lever with one hand. accompanying lug bolts may have to be 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot used as well. stands vertically and at a right angle be- 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts neath the jacking point. and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pattern. 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely. After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The 6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. stands vertically and perpendicularly be- 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo neath the jacking point after extending area, if necessary. the vehicle jack. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the en- 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the tire surface of the jack is in contact with nearest dealer’s service center or an- the ground and the wheel in question is

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 282

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

other qualified service center or repair shop.

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 283

Engine compartment MOBILITY

Engine compartment

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Jump-starting, positive terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 6 Jump-starting, negative terminal 3 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technol- 7 Unlocking, charging cable ogy 8 Coolant reservoir, engine 4 Oil filler neck

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 284

MOBILITY Engine compartment

Hood WARNING Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement WARNING of the hood is clear during opening and Improperly executed work in the engine closing. compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and property damage. NOTICE The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when mends that, in the effort to avoid such the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- risks, work in the engine compartment be age to property. Make sure that the wipers performed by a dealer’s service center or with the wiper blades mounted are folded another qualified service center or repair down onto the windshield before opening shop. the hood.

WARNING NOTICE The engine compartment accommodates When the hood is closed, it must engage moving components. Certain components on both sides. Pressing again can damage in the engine compartment can also move the hood. There is a risk of damage to with the vehicle switched off, for instance property. Open the hood again and then the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. close it energetically. Avoid pressing Do not reach into the area of moving parts. again. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts. Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. WARNING Hood is unlocked. There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

WARNING An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an accident. Stop immediately and 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever correctly close the hood. again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 285

Engine compartment MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed. Closing the hood

Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm, arrow. The hood must engage on both sides.

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 286

MOBILITY Engine oil

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options NOTICE This chapter describes all standard, country- Too much engine oil can damage the en- specific and optional features offered with gine or the catalytic converter. There is a the series. It also describes features that are risk of damage to property. Do not add too not necessarily available in your vehicle, much engine oil. When too much engine e. g., due to the selected options or country oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- versions. This also applies to safety-related rected by a dealer’s service center or an- functions and systems. When using these other qualified service center or repair functions and systems, the applicable laws shop. and regulations must be observed.

General information Electronic oil measurement

The engine oil consumption is dependent on General information your driving style and driving conditions. The electronic oil measurement has two Therefore, regularly check the engine oil measuring principles: level after refueling by taking a detailed – Monitoring. measurement. – Detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in When making frequent short-distance trips the following situations, for example: or using a dynamic driving style, for in- – Sporty driving style. stance when taking curves aggressively, – Break-in of the engine. regularly perform a detailed measurement. – Idling of the engine. Monitoring – With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable. Concept Different Check Control messages appear, The engine oil level is monitored electroni- depending on the engine oil level. cally while driving and can be shown on the Control Display. If the engine oil level is outside its permis- Safety information sible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. A red indicator light indicates that NOTICE the engine oil pressure is too low. An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 287

Engine oil MOBILITY

Functional requirements Performing a detailed measurement A current measured value is available after Via the Central Information Display (CID): approx. 30 minutes of normal driving with the combustion engine running. 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" Displaying the engine oil level 3. "Engine oil level" Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. "Measure engine oil level" 1. "My MINI" 5. "Start measurement" 2. "Vehicle status" The engine oil level is checked and dis- 3. "Engine oil level" played via a scale. The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits Adding engine oil When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not General information be possible to calculate a measured value. Only add engine oil when the message is In this case, the measured value for the last, displayed in the instrument cluster. The sufficiently long trip is displayed. quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument clus- Detailed measurement ter. Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer Concept to page 288. The engine oil level is checked when the ve- Safely park the vehicle and switch off the hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. ignition and drive-ready state before adding If the engine oil level is outside its permis- engine oil. sible operating range, a Check Control mes- Take care not to add too much engine oil. sage is displayed. Safety information General information During the measurement, the idle speed is WARNING increased somewhat. Operating materials, for instance oils, Functional requirements greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries – Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi- or danger to life. Follow the instructions tion. on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar- – Drive-ready state is established. ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat- – Steptronic transmission: selector lever ing materials. Do not refill operating mate- in selector lever position N or P and ac- rials into different bottles. Store operating celerator pedal not depressed. materials out of reach of children. – The combustion engine is at operating temperature.

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 288

MOBILITY Engine oil

Engine oil types to add NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes General information engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil. The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Only add the types of engine oil which are NOTICE listed. Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a Safety information risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine NOTICE oil is added, have the engine oil level cor- Oil additives can damage the engine. rected by a dealer’s service center or an- There is a risk of damage to property. Do other qualified service center or repair not use oil additives. shop.

Overview NOTICE The oil filler neck is located in the engine Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc- compartment, refer to page 283. tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When select- Adding engine oil ing an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 284. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: Oil rating BMW Longlife-01 FE. BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types 3. Add engine oil. If an engine oil suitable for continuous use 4. Close the cap. is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 289

Engine oil MOBILITY

Oil rating API SL. API SM. API SN.

Viscosity grades When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the following viscosity grades: Viscosity grades SAE 0W-20. SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable engine oil ratings and viscosities of engine oils can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not exceed the service data indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 290

MOBILITY Coolant

Coolant

Vehicle features and options contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are Coolant level not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related Concept functions and systems. When using these The vehicle features two cooling circuits. functions and systems, the applicable laws Always check the coolant levels of both and regulations must be observed. coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.

Checking General information There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir. Coolant consists of water and additives. 1. Let the engine cool. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about 2. Open the hood. suitable additives is available from a deal- 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir er’s service center or another qualified serv- slightly counterclockwise to allow any ice center or repair shop. excess pressure to dissipate, then open it. Safety information

WARNING With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

WARNING Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 291

Coolant MOBILITY

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. disposing of coolant and coolant additives. 5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Open the hood. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 5. Close the cap. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 292

MOBILITY Maintenance

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options General information Information on service requirements, refer This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 148, can be displayed on the Control specific and optional features offered with Display. the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, Service data in the remote control e. g., due to the selected options or country Information on the required maintenance is versions. This also applies to safety-related continuously stored in the remote control. functions and systems. When using these The dealer’s service center can read this functions and systems, the applicable laws data out and suggest an optimized mainte- and regulations must be observed. nance scope for the vehicle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was MINI maintenance system driven most recently. The maintenance system indicates required Storage periods maintenance measures, and thereby pro- Storage periods during which the vehicle vides support in maintaining road safety battery was disconnected are not taken into and the operational reliability of the vehicle. account. In some cases, scopes and intervals of the If this occurs, have a dealer's service center maintenance system may vary according to or another qualified service center or repair the country version. Replacement work, shop update the time-dependent mainte- spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear nance procedures, such as checking brake materials are calculated separately. Further fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine information is available from a dealer’s serv- oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal ice center or another qualified service cen- filter. ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models Concept and Warranty and Service Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- Guide Booklet for Canadian count the driving conditions of the vehicle. models CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance. Please consult your Service and Warranty The system makes it possible to adapt the Information Booklet for US models and amount of maintenance corresponding to Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for your user profile. Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 293

Maintenance MOBILITY

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- Position mends that maintenance and repair be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- nosis There is an OBD socket on the driver's side General information for checking the primary components in the Devices connected to the OBD socket trig- vehicle's emissions. ger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at Emissions the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. – The warning light lights up: Safety information Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. NOTICE – The warning light flashes under certain The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in- circumstances: tricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to This indicates that there is excessive check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys- misfiring in the engine. tem. Improper use of the socket for On- Reduce the vehicle speed and have the board Diagnosis, or contact with the system checked immediately; otherwise, socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other serious engine misfiring within a brief than its intended purpose, can cause vehi- period can seriously damage emission cle malfunctions and creates risks of per- control components, in particular the sonal and property damage. Given the fore- catalytic converter. going, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 294

MOBILITY Replacing components

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, NOTICE e. g., due to the selected options or country Folded-away wipers can be jammed when versions. This also applies to safety-related the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- functions and systems. When using these age to property. Make sure that the wipers functions and systems, the applicable laws with the wiper blades mounted are folded and regulations must be observed. down onto the windshield before opening the hood. Onboard vehicle tool kit Replacing the front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel. After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper Wiper blades blade must engage audibly. 5. Fold down the wiper arm. Safety information

NOTICE The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when

294 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 295

Replacing components MOBILITY

Rear wiper blade cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. Follow the safety information, refer to 2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper page 295. arm. Safety information

Lights and bulbs

WARNING Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con- tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off. 3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly. 4. Fold down the wiper arm. WARNING Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in- Light and bulb replacement jury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off General information the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions. Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. NOTICE The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. mends that you have appropriate work per- There is a risk of damage to property. Do formed by a dealer’s service center or an- not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. other qualified service center or repair shop Use a clean cloth or something similar, or if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not hold the bulb by its base. been described here. A spare light box is available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) center or repair shop. Follow the safety information, refer to WARNING page 295. Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) injury. Do not look directly into the head- Some items of equipment use light-emitting lights or other light sources. Do not re- diodes installed behind a cover as a light move the LED covers. source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are offi-

295 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 296

MOBILITY Replacing components

Headlight glass Bug light Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked. 1 Parking lights 2 Daytime running lights Headlight setting 3 Fog lights The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it High beams checked and, if necessary, corrected by a Follow the general instructions on lights dealer’s service center or another qualified and bulbs, refer to page 295. service center or repair shop. Bulbs: H7 Front halogen lights, bulb 1. Open the hood, refer to page 284. replacement 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove. Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams 2 Low beams 3 Turn signal

296 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 297

Replacing components MOBILITY

3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull – On the right facing the driving direc- it out of the headlight toward the rear, tion: turn the cover counterclock- arrow 2. wise and remove it.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. 3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock- 5. Install the new bulb with the bulb wise, and remove it. holder in reverse order of removal. In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is correctly positioned in the headlight housing and the bulb holder perceptibly engages. 6. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass. 7. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages. 4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and Low beams pull it downward out of the headlight, Follow the general instructions on lights arrow 2. and bulbs, refer to page 295. Bulbs: H7 1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. – On the left facing the driving direction: turn the cover clockwise and remove it.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. 6. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in reverse order of removal. In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is correctly positioned in the headlight housing and the bulb holder perceptibly engages.

297 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 298

MOBILITY Replacing components

7. Check the position of the bulb through 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, the headlight glass. arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2. 8. Install the covers. Make sure that the covers engage.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295. Bulbs: PWY24W 1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. – On the left facing the driving direc- 5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb tion: turn the cover clockwise and holder, turn counterclockwise and re- remove it. move. – On the right facing the driving direc- 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov- tion: turn the cover counterclock- ers in the reverse order. Make sure that wise and remove it. the covers engage.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytime running lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295. Bulbs: – Parking lights: W5W – Daytime running light: PSX24W. 3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock- – Fog light: H8. wise, and remove it.

298 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 299

Replacing components MOBILITY

Replacing the bulbs – Fog lights: turn the bulb, arrow 3, 1. Pull the cover forward out of the counterclockwise and remove it. bumper.

4. – Parking lights: pull the bulb out of 2. Remove the screws and take out the the fixture. front light. – Fog lights and daytime running lights: disconnect the bulb from the cable. 5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order. The daytime running lights bulb holder engages audibly, first below, then above. LED front lights, bulb replacement

3. Remove the bulb holder. General information – Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, The following lights feature LED technol- arrow 1, counterclockwise and re- ogy: move. – Daytime running lights – Daytime running lights: squeeze the – High beams upper and lower locks of the bulb, ar- – Low beams row 2, and remove the bulb. – Cornering light For better accessibility, remove the bulb of the fog light as needed. – Parking lights – Fog lights In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

299 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 300

MOBILITY Replacing components

Overview Bulbs: PWY24W. 1. Open the hood, refer to page 284. Position of the headlights 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

1 Turn signal 2 Daytime running lights 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, 3 Low beams/high beams arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2. 4 Cornering light

LED bug light

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and remove. 1 Parking lights 5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover 2 Fog lights in the reverse order.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

300 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 301

Replacing components MOBILITY

Tail lights, bulb replacement Side LED tail lights

Overview

1 Brake light 2 Tail lights 1 Side tail lights 3 Turn signal 2 Center brake light 4 Reversing lights 3 License plate light Side tail lights Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295. – Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights: P21W – Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W – Bulb, turn signal: P21W – Bulb, reversing lights: P21W 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove left or right cover. 1 Brake lights/tail lights 2 Turn signal 3 Reversing lights

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

301 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 302

MOBILITY Replacing components

Press the latches together, arrows 1, and Side turn signal, bulb replacement remove the bulb holder. Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295. Bulb: WY5W 1. Push the side turn signal forward in the driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it outward, arrow 2.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening. 5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. – Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights 2. – On the left facing the driving direc- – Arrow 2: turn signal tion: turn the bulb holder clockwise – Arrow 3: reversing light and remove. – On the right facing the driving direction: turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Insert the bulb holder. 5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1, and swing it forward, arrow 2.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295. The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s Vehicle battery service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free.

302 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 303

Replacing components MOBILITY

The added amount of acid is sufficient for The battery may need to be charged in the the service life of the battery. following cases: More information about the battery can be – When making frequent short-distance requested from a dealer’s service center or drives. another qualified service center or repair – If the vehicle is not used for more than a shop. month. – Steptronic transmission: when parked Replacing the vehicle battery for long periods of time in selector lever position D, R or N. General information The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- Safety information mends that you have a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the NOTICE vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Battery chargers for the vehicle battery Once the battery has been registered again, can work with high voltages and currents, all comfort features will be available with- which means that the 12 volt on-board out restriction and any Check Control mes- network can be overloaded or damaged. sages displayed which relate to comfort fea- There is a risk of damage to property. Only tures will disappear. connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the Safety information engine compartment.

NOTICE Starting aid terminals Vehicle batteries that are not compatible In the vehicle, only charge the battery via can damage vehicle systems and impair the starting aid terminals, refer to vehicle functions. There is a risk of per- page 308, in the engine compartment with sonal and property damage. Only vehicle the engine off. batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehi- Power failure cle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s service After a power loss, some equipment needs center. to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example: – Time: update. Charging the battery – Date: update. – Seat and mirror memory: store the posi- General information tions again. Make sure that the battery is always suffi- – Glass sunroof: initialize the system. ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

303 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 304

MOBILITY Replacing components

Disposing of old batteries Replacing fuses Have old batteries disposed of by a The vehicle manufacturer recommends that dealer’s service center or another you have a dealer's service center or an- qualified service center or repair other qualified service center or repair shop shop or take them to a collection point. replace the fuses. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

WARNING Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compartment. 1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.

304 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 305

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options Warning triangle

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed. The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets. Hazard warning flashers

First-aid kit

General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly. The button is located above the Control Dis- play. Storage The red light in the button flashes when the The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area. hazard warning flashers are activated. MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

305 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 306

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

General information If this is not possible, further measures will In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis- hicle's condition is sent directly to the man- tance will be informed. ufacturer of your vehicle. Contact can also be made via a Check Con- trol message, refer to page 142. Intelligent emergency call Starting Roadside Assistance Concept If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re- support is offered through Teleservice Diag- quest can be made through the system. nosis. Via the Central Information Display (CID): General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. 1. "MINI Connected" For technical reasons, the Emergency Re- 2. "MINI Assist" quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora- 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance" ble conditions. The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established. Overview A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically. SOS button in the roofliner Starting Teleservice Help Depending on the country, the Teleservice Functional requirements Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission. – Standby state is switched on. You can launch Teleservice Help by re- – The Assist system is functional. questing it through the Service Specialist. – The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Set the parking brake. Initiating an Emergency Request 3. Control Display is switched on. automatically 4. "Teleservice Help" Under certain conditions, for instance if the The driving ability of the vehicle can be re- airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is stored for specific functions. automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Auto-

306 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 307

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

matic Collision Notification is not affected cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper by pressing the SOS button. cables with fully insulated clamp handles. Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used Initiating an Emergency Request for jump-starting. manually 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. Safety information 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green. DANGER – The LED is illuminated green when an Contact with live components can lead to Emergency Request has been initiated. an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any cle until the voice connection has been components that are under voltage. established. – The LED flashes green when a connection to the MINI Response Center has WARNING been established. If the jumper cables are connected in the The MINI Response Center then makes incorrect order, sparking may occur. There contact with you and takes further steps is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor- to help you. rect order during connection. Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum- NOTICE stances. In the case of body contact between the For this, data is transmitted to the MINI two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur- Response Center which serve to deter- ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam- mine the necessary rescue measures. age to property. Make sure that no body E.g., the current position of the vehicle, contact occurs. if it can be established. If you can no longer hear the MINI Re- Preparation sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may 1. Check whether the battery of the other be broken. However, the MINI Response vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The Center may still be able to hear you. voltage information can be found on the battery. The MINI Response Center ends the Emer- gency Request. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power Jump-starting consumers in both vehicles.

General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehi-

307 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 308

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Starting aid terminals starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. The starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal. Establishing drive-ready state Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed. 2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehicle to be started as usual. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge. 3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. A special connection on the body acts as the Check the battery and recharge, if needed. battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables Tow-starting and towing To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow- Transporting the vehicle ing procedure. 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi- General information nal. The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding

308 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 309

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

Safety information Towing other vehicles

NOTICE General information The vehicle can be damaged when towing Switch on the hazard warning system, de- the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There pending on local regulations. is a risk of damage to property. The vehi- If the electrical system has failed, clearly cle should only be transported on a loading identify the vehicle being towed by placing platform. a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Pushing the vehicle Safety information To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, push it for a short distance at a WARNING speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h. If the approved gross vehicle weight of the Roll or push, refer to page 135, the vehicle. towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or Tow truck it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts The vehicle should only be transported on a can occur. There is a risk of damage to loading platform. property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting. NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when Tow bar lifting and securing it. The tow fittings used should be on the same There is a risk of damage to property. side on both vehicles. – Lift the vehicle using suitable means. Should it prove impossible to avoid mount- – Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol- tow fitting, body parts, or suspension low the following: parts. – Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. – The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

309 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 310

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

Tow rope Safety information When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. NOTICE Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable If the tow fitting is not used as intended, the vehicle to be towed without jerking. there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage Tow fitting to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting. General information Screw thread for tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo- front or rear of the vehicle. cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool of travel. kit, refer to page 294, are together in the cargo area. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. Use of the tow fitting: – Use only the tow fitting provided with Tow-starting the vehicle and screw it all the way in. – Use the tow fitting for towing on paved Steptronic transmission roads only. Do not tow-start the vehicle. – Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, Tow-starting the engine is not possible due for instance do not lift the vehicle by the to the Steptronic transmission. tow fitting. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

310 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 311

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

What to do after an accident

Safety information

WARNING Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. After an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components such as orange colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact with exposed high-voltage cables.

WARNING Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor- rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids escaping from the high-voltage battery.

General information After an accident, compliance with the following safety precautions is required with regard to the high-voltage system: – Secure the crash site. – Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage system. – Engage selector lever position P, set the parking brake, and switch off the ignition and drive-ready state. – Lock the vehicle after exiting. – Do not inhale any gases escaping from the high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a safe distance from the vehicle.

311 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 312

MOBILITY Care

Care

Vehicle features and options NOTICE This chapter describes all standard, country- When washing, water can get into the specific and optional features offered with open charging socket. There is a risk of the series. It also describes features that are damage to property. Close the charging not necessarily available in your vehicle, socket flap while washing. e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these Steam jets or high-pressure functions and systems, the applicable laws washers and regulations must be observed. Safety information

Washing the vehicle NOTICE When cleaning with high-pressure wash- General information ers, components can be damaged due to Regularly remove foreign objects such as the pressure or temperatures being too leaves in the area below the windshield high. There is a risk of damage to property. when the hood is raised. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly operating instructions for the high-pres- in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can sure washer. damage the vehicle.

Safety information Distances and temperature – Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. WARNING – Minimum distance from sensors, cam- Contact with live components can lead to eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm. an electric shock. High voltage is applied – Minimum distance from glass sunroof: at the charging connection. There is a risk 31.5 in/80 cm. of injury or danger to life. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that work on the charging connection, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

312 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 313

Care MOBILITY

Automatic vehicle washes Activate drive-ready state, refer to page 117. Safety information Headlights NOTICE Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- a risk of damage to property. Follow the stance from insects, with shampoo and following instructions: wash off with water. – Give preference to cloth vehicle Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an washes or those that use soft brushes ice scraper. in order to avoid paint damage. – Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails After washing the vehicle higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid dam- After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes age to the chassis. briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- – Observe the tire width of the guide tion can be reduced. The heat generated rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. – Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors. Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to – With rod antenna: unscrew the rod smearing and to reduce wiper noises and antenna to avoid rod antenna break- wiper blade wear. age. – Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to Vehicle care the wiper system. Vehicle care products Driving into a vehicle wash with a Steptronic transmission General information In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able MINI recommends using vehicle care and to roll freely. cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to products are available from a dealer’s serv- page 135. ice center or another qualified service cen- Some vehicle washes do not permit persons ter or repair shop. in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever po- Safety information sition N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. WARNING Cleansers can contain substances that are Driving out of a vehicle wash dangerous and harmful to your health. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.

313 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 314

MOBILITY Care

Only use products intended for cleaning creased wear and premature degradation of vehicles. Follow the instructions on the the leather surface. container. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. Vehicle paint Clean light-colored leather more frequently General information because soiling on such surfaces is substan- tially more visible. Regular care contributes to driving safety Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and value retention. Environmental influen- and grease will gradually break down the ces in areas with elevated air pollution or protective layer of the leather surface. natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve- Upholstery material care hicle care to these influences. General information Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re- Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a moved immediately to prevent the finish vacuum cleaner. from being altered or discolored. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- Safety information fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- WARNING ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously. Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction Safety information of the radar sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Have paint- NOTICE work or paintwork repairs on bumpers of Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of vehicles with radar sensors performed by a clothing can damage the seat covers. dealer’s service center or another qualified There is a risk of damage to property. En- service center or repair shop only. sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Matte finish Caring for special components Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish. Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Leather care wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to Remove dust from the leather regularly, us- 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner. steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime manufacturer's instructions. chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of

314 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 315

Care MOBILITY

adjacent components, such as the brake – Light lenses. disc. – Instrument cluster cover. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to – Matt black spray-coated components. dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and – Painted parts in the car's interior. protects them against corrosion. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water. Chrome surfaces Do not soak the roofliner. Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample Safety belts supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt. WARNING Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety Rubber components belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries Environmental influences can cause surface or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. ution for cleaning the safety belts. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub- and thus have a negative impact on safety. ber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- Use only a mild soapy solution, with the con-containing vehicle care products in or- safety belts clipped into their buckles. der to avoid damage or noises. Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry. Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com- Carpets and floor mats ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. WARNING Objects in the driver's floor area can limit Plastic components the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow NOTICE objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty for the vehicle and can be safely attached grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to and do not layer several floor mats. Make property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. sure that there is sufficient clearance for Dampen cloth lightly with water. the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- Plastic components are e.g.: moved, for instance for cleaning. – Imitation leather surfaces. – Roofliner.

315 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 316

MOBILITY Care

Floor mats can be removed from the car's Long idle times and long-term interior for cleaning. vehicle storage If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile Concept cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, For idle phases that last several weeks, park rub back and forth in the direction of travel the vehicle with a fully charged battery if only. possible. Sensor/camera lenses Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is exhausted. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of With storage times of up to three months, if glass detergent. possible plug the vehicle into a compatible power source or park it in a nearly fully Displays/Screens/Projection lenses charged state. General information NOTICE Your dealer's service center or another Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of qualified service center or repair shop can any kind can damage the surface of dis- advise you on what to consider when stor- plays and screens. There is a risk of dam- ing the vehicle for longer than three age to property. Clean with a clean, anti- months. static microfiber cloth. Safety information

NOTICE NOTICE The surface of displays can be damaged The high-voltage battery can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of by excessive discharge. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is damage to property. Before storing the ve- too high and do not use any scratching hicle for an extended period, ensure that materials. the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber to a charging station at a compatible cloth. charging location. If necessary, the high- For stubborn soiling on the projection lens voltage battery will be charged automati- of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro- cally. Make sure that the charging process fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re- takes place. Regularly check the charge fer to page 157. state. Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer than three months with a charge state below approx. 50 %.

316 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 317

Care MOBILITY

317 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18

318 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 REFERENCE

Technical data ...... 320 Appendix ...... 322 Everything from A to Z ...... 324

319 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 320

REFERENCE Technical data

Technical data

General information The technical data and specifications in this values can be found in the approval docu- Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob- ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate tained from a dealer’s service center or an- from this, for instance due to the selected other qualified service center or repair special equipment, country version or coun- shop. try-specific measurement method. Detailed

Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can model version, equipment or country-spe- deviate, for instance due to the selected cific measurement method. special equipment, tires, load and chassis The specified heights do not take into ac- version. count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

MINI Countryman Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.9/2,005 Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,822 Height inches/mm 61.4/1,559 Length inches/mm 169.8/4,314 Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670 Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4

320 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 321

Technical data REFERENCE

Weights

MINI Countryman Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,016/2,275 Load lbs/kg 926/420 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,458/1,115 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 364/165

Capacities

MINI Countryman US gal/liters Notes Fuel tank, approx. 9.5/36.0 Fuel quality, refer to page 264.

321 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 322

REFERENCE Appendix

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual contain updates made after the editorial deadline: – Information: Data storage, refer to page 12.

322 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 323

Appendix REFERENCE

323 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 324

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index A All-season tires, see Winter tires 272 Antifreeze, washer fluid 132 ABS, Antilock Brake System 187 Antilock Brake System, ABS 187 Accessories and parts 10 Anti-slip control, see DSC 187 Accident, what to do 311 Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 279 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 191 Approach control warning with city light Acoustic pedestrian protection 122 braking function 179 AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charg- Approved axle load 321 ing cable 254 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Activated-charcoal filter 217 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Activating, drive-ready state 118 Arrival time 154 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedes- cruise control 191 trian protection 122 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 178 Ash tray 224 Adapting to the course of the road, hybrid Assistance for the combustion engine 123 system 141 Assistance when driving off 190 Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis- AUTO intensity 216 play 185 Automatic climate control 214 Additives, engine oil types 288 Automatic Curb Monitor 109 Adjustments, steering wheel 110 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen- Advance climate control, see Stationary cli- ger airbags 169 mate control 218 Automatic headlight control 162 After washing vehicle 313 Automatic locking 92 Airbags 167 Automatic recirculated-air control 216 Airbags, indicator and warning light 169 Automatic transmission with Step- Air circulation, see Recirculated-air tronic 133 mode 212, 216 Automatic unlocking 92 Air conditioner 211 Automatic vehicle wash 313 Air conditioning 212, 215 AUTO program, automatic climate con- Air, dehumidifying, see Air condition- trol 215 ing 212, 215 AUTO program, intensity 216 Air distribution, manual 213, 217 Auto Start/Stop function 119 Air flow, air conditioner 213 Auto washing 312 Air flow, automatic climate control 216 Average fuel consumption 153 Air pressure, tires 266 Average speed 153 Air vents, see Ventilation 217 Axle loads, weights 321 Alarm system 93 Alarm triggering 93 Alarm, unintentional 94 Alertness assistant 185

324 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 325

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

B Camera, rearview camera 203 Can holder, see Cup holder 228 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup- Care, displays 316 port 100, 101 Care, vehicle 313 Backrest, seats 99 Care, washing the vehicle 312 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 305 Cargo area 230 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 303 Cargo area, adapting size 234 Battery, vehicle 302 Cargo area, enlarging 233 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow- Cargo area lid 85 ing 308 Cargo area, loading 231 Belts, safety belts 103 Cargo area, seating surface 235 Beverage holder, cup holder 228 Cargo area, storage compartments 232 Blocking, power window 96 Cargo cover 231 Bluetooth connection 61 Cargo, stowing and securing 231 Bottle holder, see Cup holder 228 Cargo straps 231 Brake assistant 187 Carpet, care 315 Brake discs, break-in 240 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas Brake force display 185 system 241 Brake lights, brake force display 185 CBS Condition Based Service 292 Brake pads, break-in 240 Center armrest 228 Braking, information 242 Center console 42 Breakdown assistance 305 Central Information Display (CID) 44 Break-in 240 Central Information Display (CID) operating Brightness of Control Display 58 concept 44 Bug light 296 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 156 Bulb replacement 295 Central locking system, unlocking, from in- Bulb replacement, front 296, 299 side 81 Bulb replacement, rear 301 Central screen, see Control Display 46 Bulb replacement, side 302 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Bulbs and lights 295 Safety 10 Button, SOS 306 Changing parts 294 Button, Start/Stop 116 Changing wheels 277 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 307 Changing wheels/tires 271 CHARGE, energy recovery 123 Charge state indicator, high-voltage bat- C tery 152 Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 252 Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Charging cable storage 255 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Charging cable, unlocking manually 256 California Proposition 65 Warning 11 Charging screen 139 Calling up mirror adjustment 92 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 252 Calling up seat adjustment 92 Charging, see Vehicle charging 252 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- Charging status, see Display of the charging ligent Safety 178 status 257 Camera-based cruise control 191 Charging the vehicle 252 Camera lenses, care 316

325 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 326

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg- Control Display, settings 56 ing 252 Controller 47 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification Controller operation 48 number 15 Control systems, driving stability 187 Check Control 142 Convenient closing 78 Checking the oil level electronically 286 Convenient opening 77 Children, seating position 111 Coolant 290 Children, transporting safely 111 Cooling, maximum 215 Child restraint system 111 Cooling system 290 Child restraint system LATCH 113 Cornering light 163 Child restraint systems, mounting 112 Corrosion on brake discs 243 Child safety locks 115 Cosmetic mirror 224 Child seat, mounting 112 Country timer 159 Child seats 111 Coupling, see Pairing 60 Chrome parts, care 315 Courtesy lights during unlocking 77 Cigarette lighter 224 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 78 Cleaning, displays 316 Cruise control 198 Climate control 211, 214 Cruise control, active 191 Clothes hooks 229 Cruise control with distance control, see Coasting 122 Camera-based cruise control 191 Combination switch, see Turn signals 125 Cruise control without distance control, see Combi switch, see Wiper system 126, 129 Cruise control 198 Comfort Access 82 Cruising range 147 Compartments in the doors 228 Cup holder 228 Compass 222 Current consumption 148 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 61 D Compressor 273 Computer, see Onboard Computer 151 Damage, tires 270 Condensation on windows 217 Data memory 12 Condensation under the vehicle 243 Data protection, settings 59 Condition Based Service CBS 292 Data, technical 320, 321 Configuring driving program 190 Date 57 Confirmation signal 92 Date display 147 Connecting device 60 Daytime running lights 163 Connecting mobile phone 60 DCC, see Cruise control 198 Connecting smartphone 60 Deactivating drive-ready state 119 Connecting telephone 60 Deactivation of the hybrid system 73 Connections 60 Defrosting, see Defrosting the win- Consumption, see Current consump- dows 213 tion 148 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 217 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Defrosting the windows 213 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Dehumidifying, air 212, 215 Contact with water, hybrid system 73 Deleting personal data 59 Continued driving with a flat tire 174, 177 Deletion of personal data 59 Control Display 46

326 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 327

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Departure times, stationary climate con- Driving tips 241 trol 219 Driving with combustion engine, Destination distance 154 POWER 122 Device list 60 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 187 Digital clock 147 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 188 Digital compass 222 DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- Dimensions 320 igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Dimmable exterior mirrors 109 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 187 Dimmable interior mirror 110 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 188 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 125 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 139 E Display, engine temperature 153 Display, GREEN Mode 247 eASSIST, assistance for the combustion en- Display lighting, see Instrument light- gine 123 ing 165 Easy Opener 84 Displays 138 eBOOST, assistance for the combustion en- Displays, care 316 gine 123 Displays, hybrid system 139 eDRIVE button 120 Disposal, coolant 291 eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 70 Disposal, vehicle battery 304 Electrical drive-ready state 118 Distance control, see PDC 200 Electric driving, ePOWER 120 Distance to destination 154 Electric driving, MAX eDRIVE 121 Divided screen view, split screen 45 Electric driving, SAVE BATTERY 121 Drive-off assistant 190 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 139 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 187 Electronic oil measurement 286 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Safety 178 DSC 187 Drive-ready state 116 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Drive-ready state, activating 118 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Drive-ready state, deactivate 119 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 262 Drive-ready state in detail 117 Emergency Request 306 Driver profiles 89 Emergency service, see Breakdown assis- Driver profiles, exporting profiles 90 tance 305 Driver profiles, importing profiles 90 Emergency unlocking, charging cable 256 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv- Energy control 148 ing Modes switch 189 Energy recovery, CHARGE 123 Driving Excitement, SPORT 155 Engine, automatic stop 119 Driving instructions, break-in 240 Engine compartment 283 Driving instructions, hybrid system 246 Engine compartment, working in 284 Driving mode, GREEN 247 Engine coolant 290 Driving modes 189 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedes- Driving notes, general 241 trian protection 122 Driving on poor roads 244 Engine oil 286 Driving on racetracks 244 Engine oil, adding 287 Driving stability control systems 187 Engine oil change 289 Driving tip, GREEN tip 248 Engine oil filler neck 287

327 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 328

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Engine oil types to add 288 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 171 Engine start, combustion engine 118 Flat tire, warning light 172, 176 Engine start, jump-starting 307 Flooding 241 Engine temperature, display 153 Floor carpet, care 315 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand- Floor mats, care 315 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- Fogged up windows 213 munication 8 Fold-away position, windshield wip- Entering an address, navigation, see Own- ers 128, 131 er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment Fold back rear seat backrests 233 and Communication 8 Foot brake 242 Entering a vehicle wash 313 For Your Own Safety 10 ePOWER, electric driving 120 Front airbags 167 Equipment, interior 220 Front fog lights 164 Error displays, see Check Control 142 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de- ESP Electronic Stability Program, see activation 169 DSC 187 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator Exchanging wheels/tires 271 light 170 Exhaust gas system 241 Front seats 99 Exiting a vehicle wash 313 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 176 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea- Fuel 264 ture 109 Fuel cap 262 Exterior mirrors 108 Fuel consumption, see Average fuel con- Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Moni- sumption 153 tor 109 Fuel filler flap 262 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 108 Fuel gauge 146 External start 307 Fuel quality 264 External temperature display 146 Fuel recommendation 264 External temperature warning 146 Fuel, tank capacity 321 Eyes for securing cargo 231 Functions, hybrid system 70 Fuse 304 F G Failure message, see Check Control 142 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 94 Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer- Fan, see Air flow 213, 216 sal Remote Control 220 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 103 Gasoline 264 Filler neck for engine oil 287 General driving notes 241 Finding charging stations, see Charging sta- General settings 56 tions and points of interest, see Owner's Glare shield 224 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Glass sunroof, initialize the system 98 Communication 8 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun- Fine wood, care 315 roof 96 First-aid kit 305 Glove compartment 227 Flat tire, changing wheels 277 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 57 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 176 Flat tire, repairing 273

328 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 329

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Hot exhaust gas system 241 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion 8 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 GREEN Mode 247 HUD Head-up Display 157 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 189 Hybrid system, adapting to the course of GREEN tip, driving tip 248 the road 141 Gross vehicle weight, approved 321 Hybrid system, at a glance 70 Ground clearance 243 Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 73 Hybrid system, contact with water 73 H Hybrid system, displays 139 Hybrid system, safety 73 Halogen headlights 296 Hybrid system, working on 73 Handbrake, see Parking brake 123 Hydroplaning 241 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 221 I Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- Ice warning, see External temperature cation 8 warning 146 Hazard warning flashers 305 Icy roads, see External temperature warn- Head airbag 168 ing 146 Headlight control, automatic 162 Identification marks, tires 268 Headlight courtesy delay feature 162 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi- Headlight flasher 125 cation number 15 Headlight glass 296 Ignition off 116 Headlights, care 313 Ignition on 116 Head restraints, front 105 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus- Head restraints, rear 106 ter 156 Head-up Display 157 Indication of a flat tire 172, 176 Head-up Display, see Memory function 107 Indicator light, see Check Control 142 Head-up Display, standard view 157 Individual air distribution 213, 217 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 231 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 89 High-beam Assistant 163 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see High beams 125 Wireless charging tray, see Owner's High beams/low beams, see High-beam As- Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, sistant 163 Communication 8 High-voltage battery, charge state indica- Inflation pressure, tires 266 tor 152 Inflation pressure warning, tires 176 Hills 242 Info Display, see Onboard Computer 151 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis- Information 8 tant 190 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 172 Holder for beverages 228 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 176 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Instrument cluster 138 Control 220 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 139 Homepage 8 Instrument lighting 165 Hood 284 Integrated key 80 Horn 40

329 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 330

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- Language, on the Control Display 56 cle 68 Lashing eyes 231 Integrated Universal Remote Control 220 LATCH child restraint fixing system 113 Intelligent emergency call 306 Leather, care 314 Intelligent Safety 178 LED ring, central instrument cluster 156 Intended use 10 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 295 Intensity, AUTO program 216 Letters and numbers, entering 49 Interior equipment 220 Level 1 charging 258 Interior lights 165 Level 1 charging cable 254 Interior lights during unlocking 77 Level 2 charging cable 254 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 78 Light 161 Interior mirror 108 Light-alloy wheels, care 314 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea- Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 295 ture 110 Lighter 224 Interior mirror, compass 222 Lighting 161 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 109 Light replacement 295 Interior motion sensor 94 Light replacement, front 296, 299 Internet site 8 Light replacement, rear 301 Interval display, service requirements 148 Light replacement, side 302 Interval mode 126, 130 Lights and bulbs 295 In the vicinity of the center console 42 Light switch 161 In the vicinity of the roofliner 43 List of all messages 58 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 40 Load 231 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the Loading 230 vehicle 68 Location, vehicle position 57 Locking, automatic 92 J Locking, from inside 81 Locking, settings 91 Jacking points for the vehicle jack 280 Longer idle phases 316 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 98 Long idle times and long-term vehicle stor- Jam protection system, windows 95 age 316 Jump-starting 307 Long-term vehicle storage 316 Low beams 161 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As- K sistant 163 Lower back support 101 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 82 Lower back support, mechanical 100 Key, see Integrated key 80 Lug bolt lock 279 Key, see Remote control 76 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 135 rack 243 Knee airbag 168 Lumbar support 101 Lumbar support, mechanical 100 L

Label on recommended tires 271 Label, runflat tires 272

330 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 331

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

M MINI Picnic Bench 235 Mirrors 108 Maintaining charge state, SAVE BAT- Mirror, see Memory function 107 TERY 121 Mobile communication devices in the vehi- Maintenance 292 cle 241 Maintenance requirements 292 Mobility System 273 Maintenance, service requirements 148 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Maintenance system, MINI 292 Safety 10 Make-up mirror 224 Moisture in headlight 296 Malfunction displays, see Check Con- Monitor, see Control Display 46 trol 142 Mounting of child restraint systems 112 Manual air distribution 213, 217 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Hand- Manual air flow 213, 216 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- Manual brake, see Parking brake 123 munication 8 Manual mode, transmission 136 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 40 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 262 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con- tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 trol 201 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Manual operation, rearview camera 204 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Manufacturer of the MINI 10 tion 8 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 N Matte finish 314 MAX eDRIVE, electric driving 121 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Maximum cooling 215 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Maximum speed, display 149 Neck restraints, front, see Head re- Maximum speed, winter tires 272 straints 105 Measurement, units of 57 Neck restraints, rear, see Head re- Mechanical key 80 straints 106 Medical kit 305 Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 314 Memory function 107 New wheels and tires 271 Menu in instrument cluster 151 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Menus, Central Information Display tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 (CID) 48 No-touch closing of the tailgate 84 Messages 58 No-touch opening of the tailgate 84 Messages, see Check Control 142 Microfilter 213, 217 O MID - program, driving dynamics 189 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for OBD Onboard Diagnostics 293 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Obstacle marking, rearview camera 205 tion 8 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel MINI driving modes 189 grade 265 MINI eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 70 Odometer 146 MINI logo projection during unlocking 77 Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, MINI maintenance system 292 Entertainment and Communication 8 Minimum tread, tires 270

331 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 332

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Officially use hybrid system 246 Pedestrian protection, acoustic 122 Oil 286 Performance Control 189 Oil, adding 287 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 89 Oil change 289 Person warning with City light braking Oil change interval, service require- function 182 ments 148 Picnic Bench 235 Oil filler neck 287 Plastic, care 315 Oil types to add, engine 288 Poor roads, driving on 244 Old batteries, disposal 304 PostCrash — iBrake 186 Onboard Computer 151 POWER, driving with combustion en- Onboard Diagnostics OBD 293 gine 122 Onboard literature, printed 68 Power failure 303 Onboard vehicle tool kit 294 Power windows 94 On-call service, see Breakdown assis- Pressure, tires 266 tance 305 Pressure warning, tires 176 Opening and closing 76 Printed onboard literature 68 Opening, from inside 81 Profiles, see Driver profiles 89 Operating menus, Central Information Dis- Programmable memory buttons, Central In- play (CID) 44 formation Display (CID) 51 Operation via the Controller 48 Protective function, glass sunroof 98 Operation via touchscreen 49 Protective function, windows 95 Optional equipment 9 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47 Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air control 216 Q Owner's Manual media 68 Owner's Manual, printed 68 Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 254 P R Paint, vehicle 314 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 93 Racetrack operation 244 Panic mode 93 Radiator fluid 290 Panoramic glass sunroof 96 Radio-operated remote control, see Remote Parallel parking assistant 206 control 76 Park Distance Control PDC 200 Radio-ready state 116 Parked vehicle, condensation 243 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary Entertainment and Communication 8 climate control 218 Rain sensor 126, 130 Parking aid, see PDC 200 Ratchet straps 231 Parking assistant 206 Rear lights 301 Parking brake 123 Rear seats 102 Parking lights 161 Rearview camera 203 Parts and accessories 10 Rear window defroster 213, 217 Passenger's side mirror, tilting 109 Rear window wiper, operation 128, 131 Pathway lines, rearview camera 204 Recirculated-air filter 217 PDC Park Distance Control 200

332 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 333

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Recirculated-air mode 212, 216 Safety switch, windows 96 Recommended fuel grade 265 Safety systems, airbags 167 Recommended tire brands 271 SAVE BATTERY, electric driving 121 Refueling 261 Saving fuel 245 Remaining range 147 Screen, see Control Display 46 Remote control, additional 79 Screwdriver 294 Remote control, loss 79 Sealant, see Mobility System 273 Remote control, malfunction 79 Seat heating, front 102 Remote control, opening/closing 76 Seating position for children 111 Remote control, replacing the battery 79 Seat, see Memory function 107 Remote control, universal 220 Seats, front 99 Replacing parts 294 Seats, rear 102 Replacing the battery, remote control 79 Securing cargo 231 Replacing wheels/tires 271 Selection list in instrument cluster 151 Reporting safety malfunctions 16 Sensors, care 316 RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise Service and warranty 11 control 191 Service requirements, Condition Based RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 198 Service CBS 292 Reserve warning, see Range 147 Service requirements, display 148 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 172 Servotronic 190 Retreaded tires 271 SET button, see Camera-based cruise con- Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis- trol 191 tance 305 SET button, see Cruise control 198 Roadside parking lights 162 Settings, locking/unlocking 91 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 221 Settings, mirrors 108 RON recommended fuel grade 265 Settings on the Control Display 56 Roofliner 43 Shift gate rotary switch 189 Roof load capacity 321 Side airbag 167 Roof-mounted luggage rack 243 Signaling, horn 40 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook Signals when unlocking 92 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- Sitting safely 99 cation 8 Size 320 RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat Slide/tilt glass roof 96 tires 272 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Rubber components, care 315 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Runflat tires 272 Communication 8 SMS text messages, supplementary 145 S Snow chains 277 Socket 225 Safe braking 242 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 293 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and Software update 66 front passenger seat 105 SOS button 306 Safety belts 103 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Safety belts, care 315 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Safety locks, doors, and windows 115 tion 8 Safety of the hybrid system 73 Speed, average 153

333 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 334

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Speed Limit Info 149 T Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 154 Speed limits, display 149 Tailgate 85 Speed warning 155 Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa- Split screen 45 tion 84 Sport displays 155 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa- SPORT program, driving dynamics 190 tion 84 Sport program, transmission 135 Tailgate via remote control 78 Stability control systems 187 Tail lights 301 Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charg- Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 261 ing cable 254 Tank vent 261 Standard charging, see Level 1 charg- Technical changes, see For Your Own ing 258 Safety 10 Standard equipment 9 Technical data 320, 321 Standard view, Head-up Display 157 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Start/Stop button 116 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Starting the combustion engine 118 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Stationary climate control 218 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook tion 8 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- Temperature, air conditioner 212 cation 8 Temperature, automatic climate con- Status control display, tires 171 trol 214 Status information, Central Information Dis- Temperature display for external tempera- play (CID) 45 ture 146 Status of Owner's Manual 9 Temperature, engine 153 Status, vehicle 160 Terminal, starting aid 308 Steering assistance 190 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 93 Steering wheel, adjusting 110 Thigh support 102 Steptronic transmission 133 Tilt alarm sensor 94 Storage compartments 227 Tilting, passenger's side mirror 109 Storage, tires 272 Time 56 Storing the charging cable, see Storage 255 Time of arrival 154 Storing the vehicle 316 Tire damage 270 Stowing and securing cargo 231 Tire identification marks 268 Suitable devices 61 Tire inflation pressure 266 Suitable mobile phones 61 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see Summer tires, tread 269 FTM 176 Sun visor 224 Tire pressure 266 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 68 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 171 Supplementary SMS text messages 145 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 273 Switch for driving dynamics 189 Tires, changing 271 Switch, see Cockpit 40 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 273 Symbols 8 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 266 Tires, runflat 272 Tire tread 269

334 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 335

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, V Entertainment and Communication 8 Tools 294 Vanity mirror 224 Total vehicle weight 321 Vehicle battery 302 Touchpad 51 Vehicle battery, replacing 303 Touchscreen 49 Vehicle, break-in 240 Towing 308 Vehicle care 313 Tow-starting 308 Vehicle care products 313 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 171 Vehicle features and options 9 Traction control 188 Vehicle identification number 15 TRACTION driving mode, driving dynam- Vehicle jack 280 ics 188 Vehicle key, see Remote control 76 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Vehicle paint 314 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Vehicle position, vehicle location 57 tion 8 Vehicle status 160 Transmission lock, releasing manually 137 Vehicle wash 313 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis- Vehicle, washing 312 sion 133 Ventilation 217 Transporting children safely 111 Venting, see Stationary climate control 218 Tread, tires 269 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15 Trip computer 154 Voice activation system 53 Triple turn signal activation 125 Voice command response, see Owner's Trip odometer 146 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 146 Communication 8 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 205 Turn signal, front 296, 299 Turn signal, indicator light 144 W Turn signal, side 302 Turn signals, operation 125 Warning and indicator lights, see Check Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 301 Control 142 Warning displays, see Check Control 142 Warning messages, see Check Control 142 U Warning triangle 305 Warranty 10 Unintentional alarm 94 Washer fluid 132 Units of measurement 57 Washer nozzles, windshield 128, 131 Universal remote control 220 Washing the vehicle 312 Unlocking, automatic 92 Water, hybrid system 73 Unlocking, settings 91 Water on roads 241 Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 Weights 321 Upholstery care 314 Welcome lights 162 USB connection 63 Welcome lights during unlocking 77 USB interface, position in vehicle 226 Wheel cleaner 314 USB port, see USB interface 226 Wheels, changing 271 Use, intended 10 Wheels, everything on wheels and Using a smartphone via voice activation 53 tires 266

335 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 Seite 336

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 176 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 171 Window defroster, rear 213, 217 Windows, powered 94 Windshield cleaning system 126, 129 Windshield defroster 213, 217 Windshield washer fluid 132 Windshield washer nozzles 128, 131 Windshield wipers, fold-away position 128, 131 Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 126, 129 Winter storage, care 316 Winter tires, suitable tires 272 Winter tires, tread 270 Wiper blades, replacing 294 Wiper fluid 132 Wiper system 126, 129 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 8 Wood, care 315 Word match concept, navigation 44 Working on the hybrid system 73 Wrench 294

336 Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 01402723862 ue *BL2723862004* Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18 California Proposition 65 Warning

Online Version für Sach-Nr. 0140 - II/19 MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01402723862 ue *BL2723862004*

Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18